Home

ES-2024 Series User's Guide V3.90 (Nov 2008)

1. 3 D cument Conventos cninn E 4 Safety rl ce E S 6 perspicua PR 9 Table of CORTGINIS ioi iocos aia Fa oda OR D LE RAE akaa EoCb o Di cosh CRM Fac Ride ER 11 EI ESsHIDI I er 21 ECL 25 z deuil poo Pe 29 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your DNWIGDL ae idiadekuk ink ixiiE abd A KK M Ree EE un rd LER KR RR 31 12 WOU UCHON mE 31 T 1 4 Backbone ANPC cccsieseiti bed EH dcs s Fen ren pe rear da E pU M Tet rere tx crm d 31 Te 2 BRIG E IPIE 32 1 13 High Performance Switching Example 2 eis caseus rta qoa taba a nana ut tra aei Era nan Ehre a 32 1 14 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Examples i p erret Ro tb bra cH a 33 Ta Ways to Manage Ue WII iiscsaii tero de a ena da ci gata pe Lad dr n RA 34 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switi re e eror na perta T MERE ra qHAREE EHI IRE E EIE aR E AEEA 34 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection eee eceeieeeeseee eene esee nennen nnn nn nn nn anna 35 EI ccucpomb cl e P m 35 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1isniao tcm optet urea d dida Aana FD EARNE E ENAS Ka 36 2 2 1 Ra k mo nted Installation Re uirementS sccisscescsesconiscctrsctuecestcaaniecennscerecetenncauereeneee 36 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch c cccccccsseesescceeseeeecceneeeeeeceeseeeeees 36 25222 BAIN the Switch ona ISAK aeo plte re PER EUR
2. SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 34 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 17 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 17 1 on page 127 for more information Figure 66 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Status Group ID Enabled Ports Synchronized Ports T1 T2 T3 Link Aggregation Setting Aggregator ID Status The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Ports These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group Synchronized Ports These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 35 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation St
3. By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 105 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET SUl OGEN 8 bitmask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bitmask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bitmask 11111111 11111111 11111141 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs ofall zeros is the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all o
4. ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Table 53 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment Vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 22 2 4 1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 54 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Type 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 22 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes
5. ES 2024 Series User s Guide 123 Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable broadcast storm control on the port Clear this check box to disable the feature Rate Specify the traffic a port receives in Kilobits per second Kbps If you enter a number between 64 and 1728 the Switch automatically rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 64 If you enter a number between 1729 and 1999 the rate is fixed at 1792 If you enter a number between 2000 and 103999 the Switch rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 1000 On a Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC port the Switch rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of 8000 for a number between 104000 and 1000000 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch
6. LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above
7. s mm 5 5 5 l 3 no Te PT ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 Click Basic Setting and IP Setup in the navigation panel 2 Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask 3 Inthe VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 4 Click Add IP Setup 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Server Default ManagementIP DHCP Client Address Static IP Address IP Address 182 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VID 1 Apply Cancel Management IP Ag imz18821 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 VID Po Default Gateway 216821 Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask VID Delete Cancel IP Address Index IP Address Default Gateway Delete ES 2024 Series User s Guide Tutorials This chapter provides an example of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch 6 1 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests 6 1 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured
8. 1 C Oo O 2 C r 3 C m 4 C C m 5 C C n 8 e o O 9 C c r 10 C C r 11 C O 12 C C E E s Gianini 24 O 25 ri ivit iet x j 2 B Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Figure 87 MVR Group Configuration Example Group C Multicast VLAN ID 200 z onfiquration zZ 5 Name Start Address End Address Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 m News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 mn Delete Cancel Figure 88 MVR Group Configuration Example OE Multicast VLAN ID 200 nfiguration lt 5 Name Start Address End Address Bi Est MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 230 1 2 50 224 1 4 10 230 1 2 60 224 1 4 50 Movie News Delete Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide AAA This chapter describes how to configure authentication and accounting settings on the
9. Appendix A Product Specifications Table 102 Firmware Specifications continued FEATURE SPECIFICATION Multicasting IGMP snooping per VLAN IGMPv1 v2 v3 up to 16 VLAN user configurable up to 256 groups IGMP filtering MVR Configurable IGMP snooping timer and priority IGMP throttling Static multicast IGMP snooping fast leave IGMP snooping statistics IP service DHCP relay Spanning Tree 802 1w rapid spanning tree protocol 802 1s MSTP VLAN Port based VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Maximum number of VLAN 4K 256 static VLAN GVRP for dynamic group registration VLAN ingress filtering Acceptable frame type for tagged only and all frames Security Static MAC address forward Static MAC address filtering Block unresolved address forwarding Port security Limiting number of dynamic address per port 802 1x port authentication by RADIUS Management login by RADIUS authentication SSHv1 v2 SSL MAC freeze Intrusion lock Multiple RADIUS servers Multiple TACACS servers 802 1X VLAN and bandwidth assignment Login authentication by RADIUS Login authentication by TACACS IP source guard Static IP MAC binding ARP Inspection AAA Support RADIUS and TACACS Port aggregation 2 groups for fast Ethernet 1 group for gigabit Ethernet 4 ports per group randomly selected 100BaseTX Supports 802 3ad static and LACP dynamic aggregation Port mirroring Port based mirroring
10. Acct Session ld Acct Authentic lt lt lt lt lt Acct Session Time lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Acct Terminate Cause lt lt lt lt lt lt x lt 22 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 57 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y Y NAS IP Address NAS Port Class Called Station Id Calling Station Id NAS Identifier lt lt lt x x lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt xx lt ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Table 57 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console continued ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP NAS Port Type Y Y Y Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic Y Y Y Y Acct Input Octets Acct Output Octets Acct Session Time Acct Input Packets Acct Output Packets lt lt lt x lt lt Acct Terminate Cause lt Acct Input Gigawords lt lt lt x lt lt lt Acct Output Gigawords Y ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA ES 2024 Serie
11. Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 30 1 Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 140 Management gt Diagnostic System Log IP Ping Ethernet Port Test Diagnostic Resolving 192 168 1 23 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful Display Clear IP Address Ping Port 1 Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test ES 2024 Series User s Guide 227 Chapter 30 Diagnostic ES 2024 Series User s Guide Syslog This chapter explains the syslog screens 31 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can gene
12. ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 33 MAC Table 33 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 149 Management gt MAC Table O MAC table Condition Sort by MAC x Transfer Type mac Pr vo Port 02 005 Dynamic to MAC forwarding Dynamic to MAC filtering Index Search Transfer Cancel MAC Address VID Port Type The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Management gt MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Select one of the buttons and click Search to only display the data which matches the criteria you specified Select All to display any entry in the MAC table of the Switch Select Static to display the MAC entries manually configured on the Switch Select MAC and enter a MAC address in the field provided to display a specified MAC entry Select VID and enter a VLAN ID in the field provided to display the MAC entries belonging to the specified VLAN Select Port and enter a port number in the field provided to display the MAC addresses which are forwarded on the specified port Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click t
13. 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports e 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus Application should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide PART VI Appendices and Index Product Specifications 249 IP Addresses and Subnetting 257 Legal Information 265 Customer Support 269 Index 275 247 Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 100 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable ES 2024A 438 mm W x 173 mm D x 44 5 mm H ES 2024PWR 438 mm W x 270 mm D x 44 5 mm H Weight ES 2024A 2 2 kg ES 2024PWR 4 0 kg AC Model Power ES 2024A 24 W Consumption ES 2024PWR 200 W AC Model Power Supply 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz ES 2024A 0 4
14. ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard 23 4 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 97 ARP Inspection Status ARP Inspection Status g Log Status Configure IPSG Total number of filters 0 index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete o Change Pages Previous Page Next Page The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also
15. Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 32 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 145 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen Status Logout B Help Member Menu jl ion lication Basic Setting Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Management System Info VLAN Static Route Setup Diagnostic General Setup Static MAC Forward Switch Setup Spanning Tree Protocol ARP Table IP Setup Bandwidth Control Port Status Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic i trol Port Setup ink regation Syslog Port Authentication Cluster Management Port Security Access Control MAC Table Access Control ARP Table Configure Clone ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 32 Cluster Management 32 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 146 Example Uploading Firmware to a Clus
16. ES 2024 Series User s Guide 25 List of Tables Tabla 39 Advanced Application gt Port Security Lise ther nha d eai nra si e aaae 138 Table d0 Porn Secunty EXamiple r 140 Table 41 Physical Queue Prony 21uiddcccc eese keit ce erdt aA EAD E vadat 141 Table 42 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method sssssssssssseeeeenemeemeennene 142 Table 43 ie rii mte P 144 Table 44 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting ssssssssessss 145 Table 45 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 147 Table 46 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 149 Table 47 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR _ e eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 152 Table 48 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration 154 Table 42 RADIUS Ve TRCACSY ictccssadsccccincsasrcressradoctuubrsqunerersqacdactuariaaueteenssanietuszauiintteniaauacienwaagertiaad 158 Table 50 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup oo ccccccecccccccsceceeeeesaeaeseeesessaeeneeeens 159 Table 51 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup cccccccccccccceseeeeseeeeaeseeeseseaeeeeneees 161 Table 52 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup sssssssssssssseseeneenee erret nenne 163 TBE
17. PART V Management Maintenance 203 Access Control 209 Diagnostic 227 Syslog 229 Cluster Management 233 MAC Table 239 ARP Table 243 Configure Clone 245 Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 28 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 120 Management Maintenance OLETAS Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Reboot System Config 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 is currently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configuration Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configuration Load Factory Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Default ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance Table 74 Management gt M
18. ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 207 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Index ES 2024 Series User s Guide
19. 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 26 3 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 112 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting o0 v afi 18 2 v 24 3 7 32 4 40 5 v 48 6 v 56 v 1 0 afi zl 17 2 25 3 7 33 4 41 5 v 49 6 v 57 7 E ODES aD DSCP to 802 1p Mapping a o gt tft gt HAE ae 3 afar ajr sofe v se v s o uf 19 2 gt 27 3 gt asja 43 5 r si 6 v se v Apply Cancel ME PI 20 2 gt 23 7 aefa v ad 5 sale v sof sor 13 1 y njer 29 3 aiam 45 5 v safe v e e 0 gt 14 1 gt 222 ao 3 v se 4 v 46 5 v saje v e F Diffserv 70 ie 1 v 23 2 v 31 3 v 39 4 v 47 5 v 55 6 v 63 Y The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non
20. ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 54 STP RSTP Network Example With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 55 MSTP Network Example 13 1 4 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 4 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 ha
21. Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 00 00 02 Configuration The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name Model 1 00 a0 5 01 23 46 GS 2024 Status Online ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 32 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 Management gt Cluster Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 145 on page 235 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc
22. Table of Contents sS e9 1 m 195 ELE A MIO ouis SNA AAAA o beta ux CLE ER EQM ask bos HEAR Cee nda EGRE 195 21 1 2 DACP Configuration ODUDDS 2 15 crtrddoc erdt bot ec vbt td dock ann kd t vbt dd pei dd 195 AG Borg p me ise ea ce aa ra ae saa hahaa and Jas A 195 ei DHCP REAY aususunteiteiscmtelusmmbdoui ee cee 196 21 3 1 DACP Relay Agent Informati n 2csseccucersescucire deret t tune attt sepsis eaa E 196 27 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay uiscera tratta th ha hack Fi tt hb rk tad 197 27 3 3 Global DACP Relay Configuration Example siccciseseniaieasnieaiieartereaseeniatenniseaanwis 197 27 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings uisesided en poteet odit dM se ido do eco adicto d tio a dol 198 27 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANS 2 eeeeeeeieid essent tn ttn h ha nna nina 200 Part V Managetehlouuuscaeeec sau pbER D uds an E EeoY P EMUR ai EDU EE BE uU ERA Vu asias 201 Chapter 28 Maien ANNES ui e GOE IRSE euiS X EVER ERA S Iva cen eR GRE MALES KW RE LER Rc ERUR KI M XE HA RENI ER TEE 203 20 1 The Manera e SOO CU 203 29 4 Lund FION DEU saoi 204 Voc ima proci M Tn EN EE i 204 20 4 RODOGE SyS M 205 fA quc CIS 205 E PEWiccoisgE eansppicpnax doeet 206 28 7 Backup a Configuration FIG asesesen i Gidaeixecbasazaski sub bd devi edd sbXe Lp ebt 22 ski db EP 2E CpRMM VUE tee 206 Zo FIP E EDD PEE cusa depen epee rn e
23. s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 Syslog 232 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 32 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 93 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster 24 members Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member Switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members ES 2024 Series User s Guide 233 Chapter 32 Cluster Management Figure 143 Clustering Application Example 32 2 Cluster Management Status BS Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen A cluster can only have one manager Figure 144 Management gt Cluster Management Clustering Management Status
24. ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Loop Guard Table 65 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide PART IV IP Application Static Route 187 Differentiated Services 191 DHCP 195 Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 25 1 Static Routing Overview The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers for example using HTTP telnet SSH or SNMP Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations t
25. FAN3 6129 6143 6122 3000 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 25VIN 1 256 1 256 1 256 696 Normal 1 8VIN 1 869 1 869 1 869 696 Normal 3 3VIN 3 398 3 398 3 398 696 Normal 2 5VIN 2 593 2 593 2 593 6 Normal ZyNOS F W Version ES 2024PWR V3 90 All 0 b2 11 18 2008 00 19 cb 00 00 01 System Name Ethernet Address The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes ZyNOS FAN This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the Version date created Folios This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch ress Hardware Monitor This section is available for the ES 2024 PWR model only Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature MAC CPU and LOCAL refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Th
26. Hungary Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan ES 2024 Series User s Guide 271 Appendix D Customer Support Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Support Telephone 1 800 978 7222 Sales E mail sales zyxel com Sales Telephone 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anahei
27. MVR eee 152 Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration 154 Figure 95 MYR Coniiguralon Example i2 c eia acea aan ctia do e aot ct RO 155 gi Tog gESerpejrbe cg M 155 Figure 87 MVR Group Configuration EXample ssccccccssiscesrssisaesicsssssater emo ni tert ne 156 Figure 88 MVR Group Configuration EXaMpl 1 5 diront rint na ik acta nha ERR E Eat 156 gi PpPie v Gee 157 Figure 90 Advanced Application P auis ei nel te do dto Lo eR dod b p vc Ud 158 Figure 91 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup sssssssssssssseeeees 159 Figure 92 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup sss 161 Figure 93 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup sese 163 Figure 94 Example Man in the middle Attack 5er te rbrtes eara E RXERE RENS qd 0E Era 33A a be Ad AAERED PRA AY inaa 171 Figure 95 IP Source GUANG m nn 173 Figure 96 IP Source Guard Static Binding siccciciisscacctictsscaaadcdsninadeesiaemestetsstanetedh anaana a ieee 174 Figure 37 ARP kipec tonr Si a prt cunei bete tn buses bate 175 Figure 98 ARF Inspection Log SUUS uiii kaveti d pod tbe eX addita Had Gib EH OA SERA 3S ER RR dS HR RR dd 176 Figure S9 ARP Inspection Coniigure ai ccestss cibaxxt blc babupu tit ti EM Ch es ER Ebr Ere SEED EHI eco EAA SEN EAA ainan itd 177 Figure TOU ARP Inspection Port CODTIQUEG 2 1 cnet pinana i RNA A
28. Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This appendix lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This appendix lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA 22 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 22 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 22 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 22 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 22 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections li
29. Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ and Weighted Round Robin WRR This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual Source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 101 Feature Descriptions continued FEATURE DESCRIPTION Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP MSTP Multiple STP R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only on
30. ace te Part Based MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment evel 3M evel6 3 v evel5 2v evel4 2e evel3 4 w evel2 lov evel1 lov evel 1 v Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 9 on page 87 for more information MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range i
31. device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 125 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration OLATI Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance 28 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 28 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 7
32. gt gt gt Blo 1 2 3 o D r o o o 1 2 3 4 5 amp 7 3 9 22 23 2 t a NINN S 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 9 8 Apply Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Figure 47 Advanced Application VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Aen Portisolation Setting Wizard N 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 z S IF COC EIEIEIEIFI o tT v LIDDIBIE LIBIEIEE S gt wo v oorooS9re9ue szeeteoesmgmxusS lw 26 VV cpu 10 114 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Lou CBIR oc cc oR c cicic a CoUU CIDE Co clcic cD co oe E LOU CCID cc clic oD cc ce co a cccccHOLblELL cvcvcBLDLLLEC cvccEs Loo oo RII oc cco RRB cio By popop c BEEDE c c c e Oooo DDD BBEDE c DODDO Dogg HODHE e C f E a a e E a e a maamaa S S Se Lou CoRR Cocco DDD ccc ce a eS wm CI mw CS DH BDBBH oe DD eee e DODDO eee DD ee ee OODD eee oe DEBE ooo ope cc eee cccsEELDEEE ccccHBEEE cCcv ccEgs Loe oOo ooo cD DDD L Es ceo oC ODE c co clic cD co Le roo CBD E a a a a E cHe coo oO DDR co cic cD DD LES no v oon ooS9rt9 9z9e9 t 299g amp R amp 8 amp ED mmm zr r nr r E za r nr r H ajono ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the lab
33. learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 35 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 151 Management Configure Clone c Configure Clone Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Speed Duplex Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Port based VLAN Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection LLDP Basic Setting Advanced Application OOOOOOOOOOO000000000 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 245 Chapter 35 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports Port which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example
34. 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 17 Advan ced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Activ
35. 100M F FORWARDING Of Disabled 15134 13894 D 57 51 Management M 3 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 0 0 0 4 Down STOP Of Disabled 7222 6590 0 0 0 5 Down ee LR UB Down STOP Of Disabled 151 264 a 0 0 Down STOP Of Disabled D a 0 0 0 8 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 a 0 0 0 g Down STOP Of Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 10 Down STOP Off Disabled D 0 0 0 0 Al Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 12 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 a 0 0 0 13 Down STOP Of Disabled a D 0 0 0 u DOW aewincuene S TO aaa BIB ae O isinna useasta kinisas OO less B Dow STOP Of Disbed 0 0 0 0 0 2 Any Clear Counter OB m Clear Counter A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted from and it stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off See Section 28 3 on page 204 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens ES 2024 Series User
36. 127 POR PRIS MIAN coca nra Dose reca queri E Cen d v vr cce OR pa S CDI EDIT su Or DdEE FED bxc VE CUP Lc DRU veda dra E Deva Reads 133 xc jc 137 EUN ii ee pe 141 Bull HB sirieni inssin orn bir Poco leve oorr iere i OL pP REI Pes OR ACT Foch EE c to Eo aka C De VONEdd 143 D RUN ROREM 157 SBS TS OT Ce CR OU EIER ore bete cee Oe Bet era eee telae beer EpL Loi V a 171 Lopp CHAR Me 181 IP Application er c 185 MESI eM POU aaa TTE D E TERES 187 Diterenuate d SORS iiie Doct Lio ket Reon Ont eset eR ae AICI aa aa er ioe aE RE RATER eius Le cda A 191 DACP eee ntt MT 195 Licini ee 201 TOMBE ea uoi ad croit d Ina a vac isodur novis pde o cH uiadve te L a ure c ca p AUos FobuaddUr un dile dia Uta dr EH ONU 203 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 9 Contents Overview PUSS COMM e 209 IRVIN c n 227 SIG 229 ccc aee m 233 Er an N N 239 EL m 243 procis ride ori NUR EU rm 245 Appendices and Index iiuncsatun n kka com ba hun na ino RPRO RKEEKERRERMXKERRKKREGERIERRNKURKEEKRRRIFERRN REN REKNRR NEQNE 247 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Us rs Gude mee
37. 1f a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps LES To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example Q Q apo Vi 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 11 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 13 Transceiver Removal Example EE ES 3 2 Rear Panel The following figures show the rear panel of the Switch The power receptacle is on the rear panel Figur
38. A ES 2024PWR 2A DC Model Power ES 2024A 16 8 W Consumption DC Model Power Overload protection Specification 12 V DC 1 4 A maximum The power wires should be at least 18 AWG American Wire Gauge AWG is a measurement system that specifies the thickness of wire The thicker the wire the smaller the AWG number Use a standard 2 5 mm jack plug The DC power plug should match the following specifications the measurements are in millimeters Figure 152 DC Power Plug Operating Environment Temperature 0 C 45 C 32 F 113 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 100 Hardware Specifications continued SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Storage Environment Temperature 25 C 70 C 13 F 158 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Fast Ethernet Ports 24 100Base Tx ports RJ 45 Ethernet cable connector Auto negotiation Auto MDI MDI X Compliant with 802 3 802 3u Back pressure flow control in half duplex mode 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode ES 2024PWR only Power over Ethernet to 24 PoE ports max 15 4 Watt port 185Watt system Power budget management Gigabit Ethernet Ports 2 Dual Personality interfaces 1000Base T and SFP redundant Supports 100 1000 full duplex mode only Compliant with 802 3z 802 3ab Copper fiber interface auto selection by signal detection Fiber first
39. Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 109 Subnet 2 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 110 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 111 Subnet 4 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address la
40. Auto 6 C 4000 c 200 r fo Deny Default z Auto Y Fi C DO c 200 2 40 O 0 De E Default Auto Y Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the fra
41. Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT for products with mini GBIC slots or laser products such as fiber optic transceiver and GPON products APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 for products with mini GBIC slots or laser products such as fiber optic transceiver and GPON products PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 for products with mini GBIC slots or laser products such as fiber optic transceiver and GPON products PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 for products with mini GBIC slots or laser products such as fiber optic transceiver and GPON products Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix C Legal Information ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product 1s free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the produc
42. Console Port D Sub 9 pin Female DCE System Monitoring Voltage 1 25 V 6 1 8 V 6 3 3 V 6 2 5 V 6 Temperature CPU 60 degrees C MAC 60 degrees C Fan Speed 3500 8000 rpm Table 101 Feature Descriptions FEATURE DESCRIPTION VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the relay DHCP requests to DHCP servers on your network IGMP Snooping The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion
43. Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The ES 2024A and ES 2024P WR may be referred to as the ES 2024 Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Differentiation is made where needed Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices Command keywords are in courier new font A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen An arrow indicates that this line is a continuation of the previous line Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For exam
44. Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 17 2 on page 127 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP a ink Aggregation Control Protoco Active Ci 65535 System Priority Link Aggregation Setting Group ID LACP Active Ti T T2 E T3 r Port LACP Timeout T 30 gt seconds 1 30 seconds 2 30 gt seconds 3 30 seconds 4 30 seconds 5 30 gt seconds SUMMUM e A NO i a m lf 30 v S Apply Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Advanced Ap
45. IP iv local use 0 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 Management Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 Syslog Figure 142 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup Syslog Server Setup Active O 0 0 0 0 Level 0 Server Address Log Level Add Cancel Clear IP Address Delete Cancel Index Active Log Level Syslog Se
46. Note If you are using two different RADIUS servers select round robin in this field If the designated server is not available the connection times out instead of trying other available servers Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Table 50 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Dele
47. OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance Ethernet OAM as described in IEEE 802 3ah is a link monitoring protocol It utilizes OAM Protocol Data Units or OAM PDU s to transmit link status information between directly connected Ethernet devices Both devices must support IEEE 802 3ah Because link layer Ethernet OAM operates at layer two of the OSI Open Systems Interconnection Basic Reference model neither IP or SNMP are necessary to monitor or troubleshoot network connection problems Table 102 Firmware Specifications FEATURE SPECIFICATION Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Number of IP Addresses 64 Configurable Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User Name admin Default Password 1234 Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also available Bridging 8K MAC addresses 2 way set associative Static MAC address forwarding 256 entries Broadcast storm control per port Automatic address learning and aging Aging time from 10 to 3000 sec default 300 sec Switching 8 8 Gbps non blocking Maximum frame size 1522 bytes including tag CRC Store and forward QoS 802 1p 4 priority queue with SPAWRR Port based rate control in 64Kbps for both ingress and egress IGMP snooping DSCP to 802 1p priority mapping ES 2024 Series User s Guide
48. RET PER T EH RR EUES 193 Table 68 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping usssscissuidecoi exi te p Et IorE enni Pa I Ebo E SUba Fe aea vla er deuce 194 Table 69 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting nennen 194 Table 70 IP Application DHCP Status seien rera o RP RP PEN MYR ERE a ANNE CERAM NRRRERE d REPRE RNN ERRi 196 jr FasLc ercenouduiii 196 Table 72 IF Application DHCP ic MNM r S 197 Table 73 IP Application DHOP gt VLAN uuidssmccei ci bed decr rd educi dado E codd ci i teddor ker 199 Table 74 Management gt Maes 4uduisediseci re oko 1 arti Blog ex yu Y baud edes exert ieri pd dd eia i dd e Baud 203 Table r5 Filename Conventions rrsan anter un rte Ure s ee E ere e skt bo eom kie Fen mi bu la E 207 Table 76 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients sssssssssssssssseeennen 208 Tabe 77 9 S Contool VSIA E EUN 209 Table Fe SNMP SOU mans acesacuben d EHE UR ass ERebPcN a Pati qe tipici re ed tuU M bid aM ene M PPAR ENS 210 Tabs T9 SNMP Oys aM RISE is ahd opto DR MERE m Led Ht bordi oe d eis 211 Table B0 SNMP Interface Taps iuisseeaese nnb b npe t tpe n Ek ku nani Ln pna eua trae e d PR E nna EVA eda da a 212 Te MIT 213 ES 2024 Series User s Guide List of Tables TAHE A2 SNAP IF m 213 THESS SNARE SWOR NADE ER Oo ESSE OESTE 214 Table 84 Management gt Acces
49. S444 0 ERR S Xna ARE NES 132 Figure 71 IEEE 202 1 Authentication PROCESS sasisccisssssoxesestsssanssesssscsestes FO d bI RR 33S NIGRA 3338 syansedeiaaans 134 Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication sssssssssssssssssseenenennees 134 Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x sssssssssssssseeeeee 135 Figure 74 Advanced Application Port Securiby 1 ssesieer meet po ca x orna a iE Egon y xi oa eee ada 138 Figure T5 POM Secuii EXAMI sidere itbutess rtv Dese bula qut sa EUp d eaqobutal ent beu a etas bula ted na bla ivt udinulaPesq Bt 140 Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method ies sceeen rrr trea tant ran Eb than bob a I qup REUS 142 Figure 77 Advanced Application gt Multicast sensira ninnan ianea bo EOM Eni rag ed na 144 Figure 78 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting 145 Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 147 Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile 148 Figura 81 MVR Metwork Example asas tappe tee viecaseurssannaceurtenmncaus ra AOUN nAn N AA SAA EE UO REESE uU C 4d sient 150 22 ES 2024 Series User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 MVR Multicast Television Example 5 nn rra Hehe ae daa ebd d oed ks ae 151 Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt
50. Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator When a computer requests an HTTPS secure connection the Switch sends its certificate to the computer The user decides if he wants to trust the certificate If the user decides to trust the certificate the certificate 1s used in building the HTTPS connection Please refer to the following figure 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control Figure 133 HTTPS Implementation WS BS If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 29 8 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site a
51. Switch 22 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 22 1 2 on page 158 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section 22 1 2 on page 158 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers Figure 89 AAA Server Clie
52. Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to create the static VLAN and click the Save button to save the settings 5 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 10 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID 1 Click Advanced AUIRILEDOTDNENNE ANE Applications and VLAN mum in the navigation panel port ean z Then click the VLAN EEE Port Setting link 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field PVID Type VLAN m for port 10 and click 1 r NES 2 pem r sg r Apply to set the VLAN port setting and click the MEM a a Save button to save the 5 po D Al r settings 8 rH aoo o 7 ar si 8 m All bd O 11 r 12 All b4 Li 5 1 3 Configuring Switch Management IP Address The default management IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example Figure 23 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address 1 LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI LI ec eee eee ewes
53. Table 63 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports if the sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 23 5 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 101 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure DEAS VLA ontigure VLAN Start VID Confiqure End VID VID Apply Enabled Log No None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 ARP Inspection VLAN Co
54. a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port to other ports 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 18 Change Administrator Login Password acr Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login 1 User Name Password 2 3 4 Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out Retype to confirm Access Control 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off BS Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in ban
55. ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 8 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be
56. all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Make sure to select this check box to activate ingress rate limit on this port Ingress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in Kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port If you enter a number between 64 and 1728 the Switch automatically rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 64 If you enter a number between 1729 and 1999 the rate is fixed at 1792 If you enter a number between 2000 and 103999 the Switch rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 1000 On a Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC port the Switch rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of 8000 for a number between 104000 and 1000000 Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limit on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in Kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port If you enter a number between 64 and 1728 the Switch automatically rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 64 If you enter a number between 1729 and 1999 the rate is fixed at 1792 If you enter a number between 2000 and 103999 the Switch rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 1000 On a Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC port the Switch rounds a number down to the ne
57. and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender MAC This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 23 5 on page 176 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configu
58. chapter introduces ARP Table 34 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 34 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 34 2 Viewing the ARP Table Cli
59. cuu EEEE gas a URL ARE EUR 137 158 2 POIL cecunty GOD serais aa cu dax Fe dtd bd d ditta ad Dai c die df ido Kad 137 TTO FO reip EOE mer T EET 139 Chapter 20 Queuing ono Me 141 ZU TGaeurng Method CUbFVIEIW i sexipasepter base D SR e cR ba Fi dene ears HR Fade Sd 141 2151 1 SOU Prony QUEUING 5 ERI ISUEERERE Tg peRRI E Oo ieee ep ERE ERN M ERE Re 141 20 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 222 ner ettet rei kia atn 141 20 2 COPING QUEUING eT Ic 142 Chapter 21 Makicast d M 143 PANE Tcal I 143 AN SML reco e Sa actin ssh Sates al ld eae telat eee id aaa a aa als als 143 24 3 2 VIN FREND sioe radi bread sectnmnanigndl EN RERO OE REIN HEC eu EE PERI EP Do ER OP EHE e HE RENI nmin 143 211 3 C cy eee i epeatd 143 21 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLJ MS s rduacusa ho kad tear had eer tad EI da ME FE Hana bna Checo 144 FAN DpecEraP GR UT 144 rak Muir asl OBI Rane mere Petree Peete RE LA Kt A Prem Prnt se E Kp L d E ree ttre 144 21 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN uueucssxeshiooq eb Foe et Van teni sube eh ipa x ae o pte he ERA XR lee 147 21 5 IOMP Jugar a 148 Fang 44s 1s c N 149 WARM IMR Te D 4 idu uq m LEURS 150 RINT cdi EU 150 216 3 HON MYR OD ee TD S aa 150 Zh Genaral MYR COMUTA NON MEE E E E tus 151 2 LO MYR Group LOHIQUESUD 2d aa Ret qaR Fat 31 Fat RR RR o
60. default local directory path 28 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the Telnet session immediately ES 2024 Series User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 29 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 77 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five accounts No limit sessions A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login 29 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management gt Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 126 Management gt Access Control INAANO SNMP Logins Remote Management Service Access Control Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control
61. delete the record manually Delete Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 23 4 1 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard Figure 98 ARP Inspection Log Status OF Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Apply Total number of logs 0 Index Port VID Sender MAC Sender IP NumPkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets
62. e An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 BS It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 21 7 Chapter 29 Access Control Anon administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown Figure 130 Management gt Access Control gt Logins Administrator Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Edit Logins Login acr Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password User Name pO ad Dd d AM mE A O Access Control m m p Password Retype to confirm o p puse m Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system pass
63. ee a a dit ud Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 26 3 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Differentiated Services The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 68 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31
64. high priority ports are served Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide PART Ili Advanced Setup VLAN 87 Static MAC Forwarding 99 Static Multicast Forwarding 101 Filtering 105 Spanning Tree Protocol 107 Bandwidth Control 121 Broadcast Storm Control 123 Mirroring 125 Link Aggregation 127 Port Authentication 133 Port Security 137 Queuing Method 141 Multicast 143 AAA 157 IP Source Guard 171 Loop Guard 181 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANs A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANS can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer tha
65. log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 23 1 1 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure static bindings so the Switch can distinguish between authorized and unauthorized ARP packets 2 Enable ARP inspection on the Switch 3 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 4 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard 23 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for ARP inspection Bindings are used by ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns the bindings from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 95 P Source Guard Index MAC Address ONS Guard ng Static Binding ARP Inspection IP Address Lease Type VID Port The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minute
66. loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 16 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 65 Advanced Application gt Mirroring Mirroring Active E NEUEM gee a Monitor Port Port 1 inariee amp Al Destination MAC Source MAC B al C ae SouceMAC 2 t Port Mirrored Direction i r Ingress x dienen MEMMRREERNM cR Ingress 2 T Ingress 3 E Ingress MES ss sss nges z 5 O Ingress 5 del m a l Ingress l Apply Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 16 Mirroring The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to
67. panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 27 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLANI and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 DHCP Figure 115 Global DHCP Relay Network Example DHCP Server 192 168 1 100 mom mmm mo OR Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 116 DHCP Relay Configuration Example ED DHCP Relay d Status Active v Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information v Option 82 Information ES 2024PWR 27 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings BS Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN th
68. partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain BS VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 9 on page 87 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 8 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Figure 34 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup Switch Setup g VLAN Type
69. relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients 27 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent Information This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 71 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 DHCP Table 71 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to
70. s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Basic Setting Advanced Application _IP Application Management _ System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup PoE Setup Basic Setting 1 LIP Application Management VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Queuing Method Multicast AAA IP Source Guard Loop Guard vanced Application IF Basic Setting nced _IP Application Management Static Routing DiffServ DHCP plication JP Application Management _ Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone ES 2024 Series User s Guide Basic Setting NN Application Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance General Setup VLAN Port Setting D
71. their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors ES 2024 Series User s Guide Safety Warnings This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly ES 2024 Series User s Guide Safety Warnings ES 2024 Series User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Piitige es UT 1 De ETSI IIS SOLA tL 29 Gemo TO OWE WIT NE TRI n 31 Hardware Installation and Connection sicsccccdccccesccncicccsssaecsassaniavaa x cab dta kic exe a llt iced 35 PR ARE OVOPIBN srar ianiai tort cu nidits ra Pep Doc rol or Cube qe uuu bR Vas DL a bp M oeEOP dirt Id ws 39 IrtipX ecgtgu e 45 The WER CONTGUIAION e M 47 mitaksi EGM E eeu pot CnC Em ene Ead tenets po Kato EN TT ata Trent Ten E ORME Eb a ntu Le CORE A BEL dba Ea oer 57 E EA wae EE teats ea MN E LK MU EIE iu UL M LE LL 61 System status and Port HAUS CS ee m 67 BASC SCING srt a rea ah S UD a E 71 Advanced SOUP me 85 LUE MMC ch caren cT EAA 87 cesi M 99 reme FOTN d cem te vera akan aise daelu eran ene na ere aes 101 FONI Renee ner renee cere en hebetes ME rie ep p Eb n PRODI penn fuer tbc Clar rete n rebos sr od da terre 105 Spanning Tee Prologo M 107 Ere PRINS RUN C R M 121 Broadcast Sto Control ee ee TM aint Pi NIME MERE 123 MOT T 125 MID ree MEET T D ea E OS ale
72. to a monitor port Bandwidth Control Ingress rate limiting in 64 Kbps steps Egress shaping in 64 Kbps steps ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 102 Firmware Specifications continued FEATURE SPECIFICATION Clustering Act as clustering slave or master 24 slaves can be managed in a cluster at most System management Configuration by console Telnet web Firmware upgrade by FTP web console Configuration backup and restore by FTP web console System management access control System clock by manual setup or NTP SNMP v2c v3 Telnet up to 9 concurrent sessions RMON group 1 2 3 9 ICMP echo echo reply Cisco like CLI commands Text based configuration file Administration user management Syslog Daylight saving time support 802 3ah OAM Loop guard The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 103 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1112 Internet Group Management Protocol v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RF
73. to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 105 Loop Guard Network Loop ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Loop Guard LES After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port see Section 8 7 on page 79 24 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown BES The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 106 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard OID ATE aD Active E Port Active 4 OO amp Wi Nie aA ALQOQA AC Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays a port number
74. up to 32 English keyboard characters for identification purposes Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Mask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of th
75. volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 27 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 27 1 1 DHCP Modes If there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 27 1 2 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Sw
76. 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP of Disabled o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Off Disabled 151 264 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Z Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ct WEN LUCHA UC ML cM pecu RU LU MR ie ee eer Counter PUB Clear Counter The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 31 on page 69 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting Port Setup screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 6 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 3 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP PD PWR model only This field displays the current amount of power consumed by devices powered devices or PD that use Power over Ethernet PoE to get power from the Switch on this port LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggrega
77. 1111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID ES 2024 Series User s Guide 257 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 153 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 ie gue mE EDU UP PSS eri ee eee eee m m m m m m m m um How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 104 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example 1ST OCTET Gorer octet AUHOCTET 168 1 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010
78. 12 95 Class 4 Reserved PSEs classify as Class 0 PD Priority When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority first Critical has the highest priority High has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical priority ports are served Low has the Switch assign power to the port after all critical and high priority ports are served Consuming Power mW This field displays the current amount of power consumed by the PD from the Switch on this port Max Power mW This field displays the maximum amount of power the PD could use from the Switch on this port Max Current mA This field displays the maximum amount of current drawn by the PD from the Switch on this port 8 8 1 PoE Setup Use this screen to set the priority levels for the Switch in distributing power to PDs Click the PoE Setup link in the Basic Setting gt PoE Status screen The following screen opens ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Figure 39 Basic Setting gt PoE Setup C PoE Setup PoE Status Port PoE Mode Consumption PD PD Priority O Critical 1 Iv Low 2 Iv Critical 3 Iv Low oy 4 v Low 5 Iv Low 6 Iv Low ho fa C Classification Apply Cancel The following table desc
79. 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS accounting server can be reached Table 82 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed ES 2024 Series User s Guide ED Chapter 29 Access Control Table 83 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP 0 1 root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 107 7 0 1 STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP 0 2 root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 107 7 0 2 mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when more than 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 99 of the MAC table i
80. 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator creates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 2 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 154 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting S r I I a I a I E I E I H I Hi I g I iH I i Hi g E y 192 168 1 0 24 a a eee ee ee ee m um m m m m um um You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 155 Subnetting Example After Sub
81. 29 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 127 SNMP Management Model Manager M Y Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a Switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is
82. 32 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings gt General Setup 27 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 114 P Application DHCP Global OWS ore Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information C Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation
83. 4 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 29 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID that begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 ES 2024A or 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 ES 2024PWR is defined in private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Table 79 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmsStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the fan speed returns to the normal operating range temperature TemperatureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the temperature goes above or below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range ES 2024 Series User s Guide 211 Chapter 29 Access Control Table 79 SNMP System Traps contin
84. 5 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 114 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask Ifthe ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Switch Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Switch that 1s easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using th
85. 5 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNA FILE TYPE NAME L NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config This is the configuration filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch 28 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands gt ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 28 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 207 Chapter 28 Mainten
86. 90 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port Table 80 SNMP Interface Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 Ethernet link is up linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 Ethernet link is down autonegotiation AutonegotiationFailedEventO 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when an n 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface AutonegotiationFailedEventC 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 2 This trap is sent when an lear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface Ildp LLDPRemoteTopologyChang 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 This trap is sent when the LLDP e Link Layer Discovery Protocol remote topology changes ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control Table 80 SNMP Interface Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION transceiver ddmi transceiverddmiEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 45 27 2 1 This trap is s
87. 97 port mirroring 125 126 direction 126 egress 126 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Index ingress 126 port redundancy 127 port security 137 limit MAC address learning 139 MAC address learning 137 overview 137 setup 137 183 port setup 79 port status 67 port VLAN trunking 89 port based VLAN 94 all connected 97 port isolation 97 settings wizard 97 ports standby 127 diagnostics 227 mirroring 125 speed duplex 80 power voltage 73 power connector 42 power specification 249 power status 73 power supply 42 priority level 76 priority queue assignment 76 product registration 267 PVID 87 94 PVID Priority Frame 87 Q queuing 141 queuing algorithm select 142 queuing method 141 R rack mounting installation 36 precautions 36 requirement 36 RADIUS 158 advantages 158 and authentication 158 Network example 157 server 158 settings 158 setup 158 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 107 rear panel 42 reboot load configuration 205 reboot system 205 registration product 267 related documentation 3 remote management 224 service 225 trusted computers 224 resetting 54 204 to factory default settings 204 restoring configuration 54 206 RFC 3164 229 RSTP 107 S safety warnings 6 save configuration 53 204 screen summary 50 Secure Shell See SSH service access control 223 service port 224 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP 210 SNMP 34 210 agent 210 and MIB 210 a
88. A Eana ada DOT ee PINE Ludi 72 Table 8 Basic Setting gt General SelUp ge 74 Tabie 9 Basic Seting ePi 76 Tobio 10 Basic Soning a IF SoD duis sie bed teda d Uu rA duin E acest Ro a QUA ora REDE ERU E CM DIE KENAAN a eau deanna 78 Table 11 Basic Setting gt Port SODUB iiouiseercicsecu e eese pub addet eerte ddet patte id dabit dad der pat ad dep Uk dass ra edd Epb b IIa 80 Table 12 Basie Senin POE SIBIMB udsmdsaudida quaenam ds pn yee Lea 82 Table 12 Basic Song Fok s 84 Table 14 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Terminology uisesecccckamiscceresesaaccet ences denian Cut eade EP ek neqae A 88 Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status eene 90 Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail 91 Table 17 Advanced Application VLAN gt Static VLAN 1s rnt dere da xa nes esse opidi 92 Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting 93 Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup seen 97 Table 20 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding cccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeneccaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeees 100 Table 21 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding cccccccccecceeeseeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 Table 22 Advanced Application TIG 3iunsssedescciusniviurkkesi sd NUT r RE UOI E EPEDM YES anbi i batt c ionini tenat 105 yis XE rb MANN UN E RN 108 Table 24 SP Pon ODER niae ain aat etes beue tu ida dete nantes n
89. AA xv RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here AAA Setup Click Here 22 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 22 1 2 on page 158 for more information on RADIUS servers Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Figure 91 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup ESE Setup J AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 C 2 0 0 0 0 1812 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 E 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to
90. AA E n aee E E N r i TEA Bet POSOD 79 Be POR SIS aana p E EH HERO RINReMDE MMMEM DN ieee 81 BOA PoE SEIP e 83 Part Iik i Rl H 85 Chapter 9 VLAN eee 87 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLANS uestem ast n p DIS p i red tea 87 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged FFariBS i i eie pter erra a REE tu nE AREE RERRTpMRERERUNR pA 87 9 2 Automatic VLAN EOSISIFIIOIE xissuocccieeddpetdtese obrera ddeb etl Hera aceti aaa 88 CREE ol LACREET NT RIEN NE ENTIRE ENTE UTER son Tete PARERE DUST NUTS NUN Omer Cer Se 88 OCCU ee 88 9 5 Pert VLSIN TUNINI qucuuseeassktu pco tb d SE RERFPOSSEER CO SE EH PUB CU Ug as SER HG S RR CE Rea ER 89 94 oelet ie VLAN TYPE Tee PINE 89 cbr VLAN M 89 GE cg d Bor 90 gs Slate VLAN DOE uuuisscaaimotubtidteateiecequie tela beue m enemies 90 0 5 Conig re Statie VLAN M 91 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings sisediucussnenminssemaracus ianetea diaaa etra od E exa ta dad kin 93 96 Porrbasod VLAN S UD sriianpia ae Me eldeemi ee 94 9 5 1 Coniigure a Porbbasod VLAN 15 pd n e ann n rnaar anestrus 95 Chapter 10 Statie MAC FOR WARING o itessi aci kk Lk iia AGE EA KE QI PRAES AT elu RE TERRAS RR URP UR Ea aeiia 99 PETON OW rer 99 10 2 Configuring Statie MAC Forwarding iis ssasindesaceniionin tives cherssentindersantidddiaseeni che a dp Lb rk ar 99 Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding cao deua R nah eno RE
91. Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands see the CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Table 52 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should us
92. Applicaton DHCP SATLAN s ose po Aa ard eter ER ERO meee ea ene 199 Figure TIG DHCP Relay Tor TWO VLANS usn tuuc mm tinina tulere cupiant br bela erit sEpR aA Edna 200 Figure 119 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example seen 200 Figure 120 Management gt Maintenance iscciicissenaieccuisseaaaectssstanareusuinieataissinnaaeudssnaaneearsniinatarsstaimunasssies 203 Figure T21 Load Factory ER Hr aet RNN 204 Figure 122 Reboot System COBRUBEDH sssini doo s adu douze Has ces o a ada RR da 205 Figure 123 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade see 205 Figure 124 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration sene 206 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 23 List of Figures Figure 125 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration ssseeeeee 206 Figure 126 Management gt Access Control MT 209 Figure 127 SNMP Management Model eiit erret eorr dark ainiaan AnA aaa 210 Figure 128 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP ccccccscccccesseecccceensesaceeesesecccecteseecaceuenseacaeeeteses 215 Figure 129 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group ssssseme 217 Figure 130 Management gt Access Control gt LOGINS siscccccseusercrersetescsertasuen assenuenscsasiseneacon senna gsevivenne 218 Figure 131 SSH Communication EXOTQOgle auus eene erect atre kr en dnb Enti Rr dte stands 219 igi EZ HON SE VOIE ode niet m
93. Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 22 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 22 1 2 on page 158 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Figure 92 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup a CACS Server Setup AAA Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete Boss 1 I T a T B 0 Be fe pr Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete Bas ff 3X 3ZlI m woe 1 0B 1 10 l Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers
94. C address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 19 on page 137 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 48 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding XL BEIDE Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forwarding The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save you
95. C 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2131 RFC 2132 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2475 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p priority mapping RFC 2674 SNMP v2 v2c P BRIDGE MIB Q BRIDGE MIB ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 103 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 3046 DHCP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol IEEE 802 1d MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance IEEE 802 3u Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3x Flow Control Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Cla
96. E 178 Figure TOT AISE Inspacaom VLAN COBOUNS oiasddciodesie n dot dendo Manni d acad daa ROMA 179 Figure 1072 Loop Gvad Vs ST oa Gusense toda rv rerse eti vise tibe Mdiuer bul M p Epu vU A Suae i ivId etae cu ERU laisse 181 Figure 103 Switen in Loop SING T 182 Figure 104 Loop Guard Probe Pakot iiaaeetoxeeeca npa vua sa pa reburg RE E aUEE pd etx a abi bung Res bia EEG rdi bun 182 Figure 105 Loop Guard Network DOGD 1e e itp Ra ror pex RENE FEE a Er EPA RN 182 Figure 106 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard 4i ias rrr RES E neri Ear Le ai ER E FRE AERE RM 183 Figure 107 Statie Routing CVI Ge tee m em 187 Figure 108 IP Application Static Routing cisssssscedssernnasersenmmacaustaieaswursenskanvenyiensasents aa enaa 188 Figure 109 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field 0ccccccsscccccssssncccessssanecessssanaeceesssnnseceenssanaeeeesereaees 191 zo ANE QAI uel rc 192 Figure TIP Applicaton gt DINGSEN ER 193 Figure 112 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting seen enne 194 Figure 113 IP Application DHCP SUB dosinten a EH a CERE EHE ERE RERM pee err ed e batepetu ERU 196 Figure TT14 P Application gt DHCP gt Global 2 251 rre RR PE EHRE Rp rane aAA AA 197 Figure 115 Global DHCP Relay Network Example 1 2 erinnerte thanh nau ERR ku Eta akku Rt haa hon 198 Figure 116 DHCP Relay Configuration Exemple 1 cesse tha et hd HE renia b bz ey ERR bbb dde Rabe 198 Figure 117 IP
97. E BN S EcEM HM PN MP MEO ME mete 219 Foue TOO HEIES IniploibH HON uaiusxeasntetdeddeupdnenidaschn trees Petite ind otc n terre Peter i don e aid 221 Figure 134 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer ssenm emen 221 Figure 135 Security Certificate 1 Notecape asco trore Etpe teu tbbt i Yu iniiis nre eiea Eaa anain ER UR uA 222 Figure 135 Security C rlificate 2 INetecaE i esie datei handbag Na 138 HERR d S Yat 3 rapa dante 222 Figure 137 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection issue persos ust oras a snp Eprn keen aora aere no rpr e aeu ge Epue 223 Figure 138 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control seessssseese 223 Figure 139 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management sssseee 224 Figure 140 Management DIgoll xadeesatenee se E tula ease tna uetigiai mba amma ieee 227 Figure 141 Management gt Syslog enscen qax RF sscansexssascansisaassasusiessiacanseses E 230 Figure 142 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup cccccesecscceeessneaeceesseeneceeeresneceeeesteeecceeensnsecenaneneees 231 Figure 143 Clustering Application Example 45 5 i itera sive abuti ia HIR EE eva dd Un aioa toveadduunanteaadane rants 234 Figure 144 Management gt Cluster Management eeeeesseessseesee eene nennen nnne nnn nnne nnn nenas 234 Figure 145 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen sssusss 235 Figure 146 Example Upload
98. EA FREE EFI AER dE eue 244 Table 99 Management gt Configure IDEE uiis cho retinak bnnc eti tha nk bk d RN d E hh erdt d 246 Table 100 Hardware Specifications iicpecixe niei kei Hood toiin Eon cag kv ka LM HEN IE Pen EXEDI inant dads EK Mie RR EE 249 Tabte TOT Pour DESCHDDOTIS acs hee coc pin rib aia di en o f oe e o o gee rus b ann 250 Table 102 Ue creer E m 252 TADE 103 Standards SuUPPOrnEd ee M 254 Table 104 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example ssssssssss 258 Table 109 Subnet MaRS E 259 Tabie 106 Maximum Host NS cise ees toos edo a aaO a t p Rt us 259 Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ssssssssssssssssssssseeseeereen nennen ensis 259 TREE 108 SUBNET e 261 Bis Ne TUS SODITA ernia 262 Ta wubb obI s Wem ee eo 262 Tabe TTI T A e 262 Table M2 IM NS ait tceiac tuna Pado dep at arse Pod kE c EAE TUE ADEM 262 Table 113 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning ineo rero dau Ee PE Ped eue EFE dr paar d eue rea acne 263 Table 114 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning eene nnne nnn nnne 263 ES 2024 Series User s Guide List of Tables ES 2024 Series User s Guide PART I Introduction Getting to Know Your Switch 31 Hardware Installation and Connection 35 Hardware Overview 39 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applic
99. EIER s gt BEI sb bebebe gt BIRR Ble gt gt e e ABDEL e e eble 1bbbbbblblblblblsb5 blblblbjbl e ee eble amp bb ebe bblblbjblbls gt e e bjblblbjbls e 5 je ab bP gt PBIB Ble biblblblbl e ee eple amp bbbbbblblblblbls gt e e e RELEE e gt e e eble 8 BEEBE e gt e gt e BEBBE gt gt gt gt e BEBED gt o e bJblblblb e pleblklb e gt gt e b b blblb gt e Bbbb e gt e bl blblblb gt gt gt gt gt lid b gt 2 blblblblb s e b b blb b e gt e bi b b blb gt BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt e BIB BIBIb gt gt 30303 SERIES e5bbbbblblblblbls n blblblblb s gt e ople bbbbbblbilblblblsb5 blblblblbl 5b5 bls 5bbbbbliblblblbl bilblblblbls e e eB s b5bbbbblblblblbl s n biblblblbls e e e Ble 7b b gt 2 PBIB Be 2 2 2 2 BBR B e gt gt e eple BIBIBIBIB gt gt gt o HEERE gt 2 gt o BIBIBIBIBI gt 2 Bebb gt gt gt BREE gt 2 gt e REEERE gt 2 Bbbb gt e gt BEREE gt gt gt e BU 2 Bebee gt gt gt BEREE gt gt o e BRIERE n RBBB gt gt gt gt BBEBIE gt gt gt gt gt BBIBIEIE gt gt o eee eo DARRE gt e e e AARRE e e e be Ble bbbbbblblblblbls gt e e blblblblb s 5 ee Ble ob xbbbblblblblbls e e e e DRRR e oe e e Ble b5bbbxblblblblbls e e e e ARRRE e e e be Ble e e e e e DEEDEE e gt e gt e RIRIRIRIR gt 2
100. ES 2024 Series Ethernet Switch User s Guide Version 3 90 11 2008 Edition 3 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address _http 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ES 2024 using the web configurator You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide contains information on setting up your hardware Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information CLI Reference Guide The CLI Reference Guide is intended for people who want to configure the ES 2024 via commands BES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters zyxel com tw ES 2024 Series User s Guide 3
101. N This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 21 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Figure 85 MVR Configuration Example Usum m mmm i 1 News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 f HLAM I i Multicast VID 200 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 i H 1 i 1 OO PA B H i S QD AS C i To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 86 MVR Configuration Example aD MVR Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active I Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Mode Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging r
102. NNIUS ERR PLAKAT pULARS 39 Figure 10 Transceiver Installation Example 14 2 acere rra ttr edd saiataeiddanniceuua inanakan Ed 41 Figure TT Installed Transceiver 22 5 arctius paure vri ni d eere pee rive i pe vc ra Lb E 41 Figure 12 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example ccccseseecccccenseesscenesesecceetensenesecsuessecseeenneaeeas 42 Figure T3 Transceiver Removal Example iuosesterpenisa eter aute bl cub beboveda m ane Pr omni am ana 42 Figure TAC Rear Panel 42 Foure TS DO Rear Panel eR 42 Foue 1C Web Camiiguranor ll qu ree 47 Figure 17 Web Configurator Home Sereen Status 1s escis rr rebar aaa ioossdsasasiors anand aaesntias 48 Figure 18 Change Administrator Login Password eeeeeeseiesiseess eese eet th nennen ith kennst th aa ada nada 53 Figure 19 Resetting the Switch Via the Console POTE 1ioicessec tese ee creep tetra beo tortue rtp naa 55 Figure ZU Web Configurator Logout SOIGBIT 2 2 cnt ep rtt Sept t ads depot AIR RPX PL ARES SRPRUA FEN P RR EARMEN RF ESO PR MU XS 55 Figure 21 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN asniensis n aa ni ENAA 57 Figure 22 Initial Setup Network Example Polt VID sisssccisiuetsaetcduncssntsissdvansesatiertasiaticssueinodatenancenesostide 59 Figure 23 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address ssse emen 59 Figure 24 Tutotial DHCP Relay Stenar 2s error Erb oM bebx eR bebe IN N 61 Figure 25 Tutorial oer VLAN Type to DUE IGI Lusisescbasissputzti
103. O URL Reti 173 FEM Heri M R M 175 23 4 1 ARE Inspection Log SUIS iecur idee etti acia eiad dated dein itid disci dde vind 175 29 5 ARP Inspection Configure iudico pack Vad cadets cyan p eed ea eb uc A e PEN RA ead ade 176 23 9 LARP ibspection POIL CODIQUESE ucpcrieieprpedcses Febr va e npud ene redeem orbe eet ru een EHHR 178 22 9 2 ARP Inapacaon VLAN GCOPBOUEG 1c t rrr b betta drsnika tss indt 179 Chapter 24 Eso RAE PPPE A E T A EA E E A A E E TET 181 24 1 Logn Guard Vando e aE E E 181 tba LOOP Guard GEW T M 183 Part IV IF AppliCat Olina aa HOS 185 Chapter 25 Statio FROG me 187 2a T oaie RONN SPW ecc 187 20 4 COMUM Sale RoG E 187 Chapter 26 Differentl ted Services noni aa iaa 191 M WwESDIOURS 42 METTUS a aaaea tren Terry eer 191 26 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavigf uieen pectine o Pepe End e e Neh ERE Nw PE FER pa ER asp 191 20 1 7 DINER Network EXeple si sssseeert sbetis baeo pere an SE sans Probe oa eLIs eae TEE M Ka UT SQUE Fave 192 25 2 PAINE DIDON cess 192 25 9 DeCPHO4IEEE S02 ip Prionty GLO ccasecczstasenersniedadmaniqdadan bna qao belts da E EM se qaa aeta 193 25 3 1 Configuring DSCP Songs scavcicduricesscscsscossrdssccssantedue vn dtd A nini raaa rii 194 Chapter 27 4 m e N 195 ES 2024 Series User s Guide
104. OP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 20 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 x C Any Clear Counter C port 29 9 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 138 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control J Service Access Control J Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet v 3 SSH e FTP 2 1 HTTP e lo p Minutes HTTPS 2 443 ICMP v SNMP v Apply Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 87 Management Access Control Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default
105. Q VLAN Application Examples A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANS refer to Chapter 9 on page 87 Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example ES 2024 Series User s Guide 33 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 47 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use File Transfer Protoc
106. R 245 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Part VI Appendices and Index sees 247 Appendix A Product SpeelTicet iori arsin PE TDRDRU HE RI OU REID RR DECOR CH la d 249 Appendix B IP Addresses arid Subnetting iiiisiisissisiasisssecsnsasrssssvisiearsisarsiseaesivannsiaeviasaisieanencs 257 Appendix C Legal IIDFSHOCL oak Op EREEREPEFCEERCERE n PRI URP E E aad 265 Appendix D Customer SODBEFLanaapatEHATHEFHEHORER Y FREE ER EUR TMEEXETRVHE TROU Fa HE FE ER RH a i 269 L E E 275 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Table of Contents ES 2024 Series User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures Figure TBackbolte ADIIESUDE uiis pan s nes Fate ec aaa i de ea t a Er di 31 Figure 2 Bridging AppheatOn deeem 32 Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application eec 33 Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example 1 so prtt a rrr P RRL OSA RR SER aii URP AE REM AE d 33 Figure 3 Putachingd RUDS Feet et TER 35 Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets seee ias cierre erts cer tbi er rice a db rac Lc cud 36 Figura 7 Mounting the Switehi n a Raek 1e retirer ati Kop av EXE A Mein oA dI RR FEE un EPA E ERR a 37 Figure GION Fam E 3 2 0 EA sera tovbul ate eid anda COR MER RARI c oM Ebo lu Um Fo E HORE E Cp DM RAM UA 39 Figure 9 Froni Fang E3 ZUZAPEIS Lousuisisenestsstepenastverrt p ert BE NOR PEASESS ER PPUL E EROA E
107. RARRRRXAN REA eai ARSA iaa S iAd AUR EE 101 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding OVOPVIGW 1i scenari parar ntt km Rt cto 101 11 2 Configuring State Multicast Forwarding 2e crore tette eret innnan 102 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 13 Table of Contents Chapter 12 FATE Lii OR KOUA VO SIE ERUA AREE AGIR OG A A T EAN EE TAE FE TERM TA 105 12 1 Configure a Filtering RUIS uuo kenne dina Lg addc ad ed adt e 105 Chapter 13 oc Wir duriter 107 13 1 STPIRS IP CVO wn 107 fe RO 1 oa OMNO gamer EOS E 107 TAZ A SIP WARS Fe M 108 TAPS UE POR IANS A e HR 109 RE A Ie SP m TR 109 13 2 Spanning Tree Configuration SOFGOE siscccccsicccecccsccsstustasnssserctand d tta ttd dubi de E d ddr vanes 111 13 3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol eseieesessisiseeeeeiene tenenti 112 13 4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status ose ke teeth reper ena Ropa en SE KE RIXA RAE ern 114 13 5 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol eeeceeeeeeeetnn nnne nnne nnno 115 13 8 Multiple Spanning Tres Protocol Status esee iset bas rna ERR Fe aee uE Lire td oaa iia 118 Chapter 14 Iri perg T 121 14 1 Bandwidth Control Setup xudsesceeusecceusk vasi asco aues dac caa suxk s dona va oaa ien raa er sea RNE 121 Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Contro esiiasesavaXate noun Ran no to
108. SCRIPTION Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains 8 6 1 IP Interfaces The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet m
109. Sa PI cti ac pace Sg cal cea a a oachailsledua 165 Table 54 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute coaccccccccscccnsicssssanenanananneeananshaeesacantearevacenatenessneadseenscansienes 166 Table 55 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ssssssssssssseeeeeeeneennee 168 Table 56 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ssssssssssssssseeeeenne 168 Table 57 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ssssssssssssssessseeeeneennennenee 168 Tab 58 IP Soure OUAIS aoo oe ed nce Eras ee Daci e LA oa d eco os a Dai od p aute 173 Table 59 IP Source Guard Statie BINE iuxzrepbreicertbeprsons arie EFHE n eee eek ii mene cb denke iced d GS 174 Table GU ARP nepection DIOS uicuueneseoxtitexeekes lene suene epus ea incetinea anedier 175 Tib STARP Inspection Log PAS 22 essei ceruice rete ce aba Eu ERI Rp dnx Rice ea a ER a 176 Table De ARP Inspecipii CORNER seon aN NEP IE EAR EUIS E FH IN Ope bnEPI poe FEE LER E RIUM 177 Table 53 ARP Inspection Port Configure 1er dtr pra turri ry rho ra Lak pod Li x ENE 179 Table 64 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure eieeaeesiieeseseeeeies eene tnn th tratta h nh aa dd Roth Aa dd ERE RA dd 179 Table 65 Advanced Application Lopp QUAE siisii in crt eion eo DX PAR Fo CRY OnE A 183 Table 66 IF Application Statie RONG 4iasscktu roris ober aero d kd Lo b d D t t i S 188 Table 67 IP Application gt DIEGEFV usos rend rie REM REEF EROR EEQUA IR RERRREUMd PaREKHE MUR RE CUR
110. Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Note If you are using two different TACACS servers select round robin in this field If the designated server is not available the connection times out instead of trying other available servers Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Table 51 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instru
111. Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 2 27399889 Fax 886 2 27353220 Web http www zyxel com tw Address Room B 21F No 333 Sec 2 Dunhua S Rd Da an District Taipei Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Bangrak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand ES 2024 Series User s Guide 273 Appendix D Customer Support 274 Turkey Support E mail cso zyxel com tr Telephone 90 212 222 55 22 Fax 90 212 220 2526 Web http www zyxel com tr Address Kaptanpasa Mahallesi Piyalepasa Bulvari Ortadogu Plaza N 14 13 K 6 Okmeydani Sisli Istanbul Turkey Ukraine United Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 0845 122 0301 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK ES 2024 Series User s Guide Index Numerics 802 1P priority 81 A about the
112. This link takes you to a screen where you can configure filtering of unauthorized ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network IP Application Static Route This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management Management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to
113. X X 100 Drop packets from unknown MAC addresses learn up to 100 MAC addresses ES 2024 Series User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 20 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Table 41 Physical Queue Priority QUEUE PRIORITY Q3 4 highest Q2 3 Q1 2 QO 1 lowest 20 1 1 Strictly Priority Queuing Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 20 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a por
114. a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 26 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 109 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwardin
115. a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 78 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control 29 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 29 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 267
116. able RSTP Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root Switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds ES 2024 Series User s Guide 113 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in secon
117. activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail Port without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Enter the port number of the monitor port Ingress You can specify to copy all incoming traffic or traffic to from a specified MAC address Select All to copy all incoming traffic from the mirrored port s Select Destination MAC to copy incoming traffic to a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the destination MAC address in the fields provided Select Source MAC to copy incoming traffic from a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the source MAC address in the fields provided Egress You can specify to copy all outgoing traffic or traffic to from a specified MAC address Select All to copy all outgoing traffic from the mirrored port s Select Destination MAC to copy outgoing traffic to a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the destination MAC address in the fields provided Select Source MAC to copy outgoing traffic from a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the source MAC address in the fields provided Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjust
118. aintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the Configuration Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the Switch System Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch 28 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults 2 Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 121 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Internet Explorer X 32 Are you sure you want to load Factory default Cancel 3 Inthe web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 28 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration BES Clicking the Apply or Ad
119. also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 13 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 23 STP Path Costs LINK RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Cost Path 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Cost Path 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Cost Path 1Gbps 4 3to 10 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 Cost On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the roo
120. ance 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 75 on page 207 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 28 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 76 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path Initial Local Directory Specify the
121. anced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Index 1 Change Pages OREINEN The Number of VLAN 1 VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search VID Elapsed Time Status 1 2 43 32 Static Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Search by VID Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma and click Search to display only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch The Number of VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch The Number of Search Results This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display in the list below This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN Screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch Dynamic using GVRP Static added as a permanent entry or Other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Prev
122. and results associated with different port security configurations Ports 1 to 5 are configured to Port 1 Forward all packets and learn all MAC addresses e Port 2 Forward all packets and learn all MAC addresses Port 3 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and do not learn MAC addresses Port 4 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and do not learn MAC addresses Port 5 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses but forward packets from up to 100 learned MAC addresses ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Figure 75 Port Security Example OIE MAC Freeze Port List MAC freeze Port Security Active m Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Iv 1 O IV o 2 IV IV 0 3 Iv 0 o 4 IV O fi 00 5 IV IV fi 00 6 O IV 7 D I 2 rj I o Apply Cancel The following table is a summary of configuration and results of this example Table 40 Port Security Example SETTINGS PORT ACTIVATE ACTIVATE LIMIT NO OF RESULT PORT ADDRESS LEARNED MAC SECURITY LEARNING ADDRESSES 1 X 0 disables limits Forward all packets learn all MAC addresses 2 X X 0 disables limits Forward all packets learn all MAC addresses 3 X 0 disables limits Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses do not learn MAC addresses 4 X 100 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses do not learn MAC addresses 5
123. and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 22 2 3 AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Figure 93 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup Authentication Type local OEE ED Method 2 s a Method 1 local mM M i E Method 3 Authorization Type Active Method Exec O radius Dot1x O radius Accounting Update Period o minutes Type Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege System O r radius gt Exec O O start stop radius J Dot1x Ci O tart stop J radius Commands E m stop only tacacs o Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Advanced
124. anges to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 21 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave re
125. apter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost See Table 23 on page 108 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN Thi
126. arest multiple of 8000 for a number between 104000 and 1000000 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 15 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control c Broadcast Storm Control J Active O Port Active Rate O Kbps 1 E 64 Kbps 2 E 64 Kbps 3 E 64 Kbps 4 O 64 Kbps 5 O 64 Kbps 6 O 64 Kbps 7 O 64 Kbps p Rice ec TL MM cuu su CMM RN MP mmus RM Apply Cancel
127. ask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Configure IP addresses for accessing and managing the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s See Table 102 on page 252 for how many IP addresses you can configure ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Figure 35 Basic Setting gt IP Setup Address IP Address VID Index LIP Setup Domain Name Server Default Management IP DHCP Client Static IP Address VID 1 Management IP Addresses IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Address 172 23 37 206 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 172 23 37 254 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain Name Server DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Management IP Address Configure the fields to set the default management IP address DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address and subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address Static IP Addr
128. at IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Switch will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Switch unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Addre
129. at you want to configure DHCP settings for on the Switch See Section 8 6 on page 77 for information on how to do this ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 DHCP Figure 117 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN ABuENEDSDDEENEP Stati VID Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information C Option 82 Information C ES 2024P WR VID Type DHCP Status Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Clic
130. ate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Name Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information Digest This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root Switch Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root Switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Swit
131. ation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 6 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that 1s a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANS are specific only to the Switch on which they were created BES When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN BES In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 9 6 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen Figure 46 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Allconnected Apply Setting Wizard Nn Oo tT DO O KR 00 BRGGG s s
132. ations of the Switch 1 1 Introduction The Switch is a stand alone layer 2 Ethernet switch with 24 10 100Mbps ports and two Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The ES 2024PWR comes with the Power over Ethernet PoE feature With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet SSH Secure SHell any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management See Appendix A on page 249 for a full list of software features available on the Switch 1 1 1 Backbone Application The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application ES 2024 Series User s Guide 34 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example application the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high s
133. ator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 2024 Series User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup e Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Configure the Switch IP management address Before you begin you should log in to the web configurator 1 Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch 2 Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 47 for more information 5 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANS confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 10 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 21 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN a tannaananananana ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 Cli
134. atus continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 17 2 1 on page 128 for more information on this field Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP 17 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 17 1 on page 127 for more information on link aggregation Figure 67 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting c ONSRDGECDBICSESGDHETXIGLDCSNENEO Status LACP Group ID Active T1 O T2 CO T3 O Port Group None None Oo mM amp WEN Nor Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Aggregation Setting Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group ES 2024 Series User s
135. bAEEUR ERR PS DEN MIU d pM EE Iv cRab PRU RF EREdUIR 37 Chapter 3 Hardware OV OP i aia ie ss tes Sec cite aE E iiiaae a 39 Sl rant Panel COND MB c saissctejsdeiiscaciatoiitertnieissededGicsieielaelitetcantceddehiecliddamsdetiniaboiacetonads 39 NN E e TR discs DR E T TT 40 SEC Niue P T 40 ES 2024 Series User s Guide LE Table of Contents 3 1 9 MI DIOE ue etepe pr etl a er apte HR Ue oia nada ta i occ teilen dus 41 JAROA PONO Meet T EM 42 KE CONNECIOT M 42 cR haat A oa ca Ra sh rena Ve Sasa Sal cys Aaa ti ra 43 Part Il Basic Configuration cccanciessnscsnnannncassccnnsasnssancnnnnsaeesnnnnnannanemnsscecixs 45 Chapter 4 THE Web Configurator associeres aaaeeeaa S S A N aeiaai 47 LN Uc MT CT 47 CR AcUru Esc e 47 LEONIS Aoc c cm 48 aS Chee VOU uio rcc 52 SA Saving Your C nnguUraOT e 53 LR ic s Keo 27 aee NS 53 4o RoN ME p s MT waa anmemaoudO MEI eOs 54 46 1 Reload the Configuration File 2c s tense d dna o Sa od d Fast deua or S ER Re deba reda 54 4 7 Logging Out of The Web Configurator sse eere attract tnu anth tta n HP RO DEa EPA ae DER 2 uaa a 55 C ipll Mee 55 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Examplar kinase an etn IaPUA SRKSRCRKGK CER KNE SR xA CuR KM ERG RANGE XKE CUR AM RU aR ekrak ARANEON 57 2l TOV tco CDU ta a aad Uic SELLAM ME DP RUE D IA bdr pd aa Sad 57 XR es ei LI a TLAN Mr ENT 57 5 1 2 ogg ONL VIEN uis
136. bles carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY on the motherboard IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment For detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device The PoE Power over Ethernet devices that supply or receive power and
137. ca Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Cesk Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France 270 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary India Support E mail support zyxel hu Sales E mail info zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest
138. cast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next BES You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch LES Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide 151 Chapter 21 Multicast Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR VLAN ea MVR Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active r Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority fo Mode 6 Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None z r 1 O O O 2 C c O 3 C C n 4 C o r Active ana Add Cancel Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Se
139. cast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them Figure 49 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s within a VLAN group Figure 50 shows frames being forwarded to devices connected to port 3 Figure 51 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 Figure 49 No Static Multicast Forwarding ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding Figure 51 Static Mutlicast Forwarding to Multiple Ports 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s Click Advanced Applications gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You ma
140. cation gt Multicast NUncrEituE Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 21 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 21 1 on page 143 for more information on multicasting ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Figure 78 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting Multicast Setting _ Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Querier O IGMP Snooping Host Timeout Bao 802 1p Priority No Change IGMP Filtering Active r Unknown Multicast Frame o Flooding C Drop Port Immed NoTiial aceon cack lace Sroup Max Group Throttling IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Leave Limited Num Profile Mode C c C O Deny Default Auto J 1 O c 4000 c 200 m fo Deny gt Default z Auto 2 o 4000 c 200 m fo Deny Default Auto J 3 C 4000 C 200 r fo Deny z Default Auto 4 C 4000 c 200 O fo Deny Default Auto J 5 C 4000 C 200 r fo Deny Default
141. cceeeeseneecserseneeceeenneeee 222 2903 The Mam I TT 222 48 9 Senice Fol dcc ODIO iussisse dI DEA DOR KU TUB ERU DT NO OUO UE ERO MEER 223 29 10 Romo Mangone Qusaotiecxumiibxntedtaeedidb ec dasu sass niadedeniasoadsena OQ OR UU 224 Chapter 30 DHEGHDSI iwi nsi A id viC UE E E VUE Le A A FRA E T ARS RUEAE ENG E REELR 227 CUNBEIT cii per RE 227 Chapter 31 Lodo RR E mer E Pu E er cer E a Db NNNM RAE 229 SETS OT VONN T 229 uds Suo ACU A A E EE AA EA E A A EAA AA 229 Olid Syslog Server SOUS isasun iaai 230 Chapter 32 erudire WM O O O OO O AX 233 32 1 Clustering Management Status Overview eessessseiseses sena nna tha nat atta naa nad 233 32 2 Cluster Management Status Gm riknan en saneei 234 32 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Lettre erret nonae nid 235 32 3 Clustering Management Configuration eeeeeeeeeesseees eene nnn tht nna neta nnda nna 236 Chapter 33 iex mem AEA ai 239 Sa 1 MAG Table COVE c 239 33 2 Viewing the MAC Table 11 sepas tern bad eph aaa No daga ERA dnd KEANNA RR AR NR AM ga ER paa Ria aa 240 Chapter 34 PRP rl fm E RR 243 S ME HAE EIeU 1 c 243 mL IT MOW ARP NOUIS uates tte aei tate ved d ea xr s ae A ii tue 243 es VIENDO TEARF Io Mee RT 243 Chapter 35 NTS CNG p M P 245 os SOMOS INS PE
142. ces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN ES 2024 Series User s Guide 237 Chapter 32 Cluster Management Table 96 Management Clustering Management Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members Candidate List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The Switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list an
143. cessive Late RX CRC Runt 64 B5 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant 0 6 0 0 0 8 0 o0 gt N oO 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 13 1 3 on page 109 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statisti
144. ch must communicate with the root of the MST instance ES 2024 Series User s Guide This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen Bandwidth Control 14 4 Bandwidth Control Setup Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control Active v e Active ws OO amp tw N e 4 na Oooo lt lt Bandwidth Control J r Ingress Rate Kbps ZE Kbps 4 Kbps 5 Kbps 4 Kbps 4 Kbps 6 6 6 4 4 4 4 SO Kbps 4 4 c Kbps bp Active OO Oooo ooo Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Bh B TTE Kbps Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control Table 30 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for
145. ch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is confining the broadcast to a specific domain ES 2024 Series User s Guide duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus Chapter 9 VLAN 9 2 Automatic VLAN Registration 9 2 1 GARP 9 2 1 1 GARP Timers 9 2 2 GVRP GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following tabl
146. check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Learning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active activated in the Basic Settings Port Setup screen with address learning enabled ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Table 39 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Limited Number Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned of Learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with MAC Address these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 8192 0 means that the limiting of learned addresses is disabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19 3 Port Security Example The following example demonstrates the various settings
147. ck Advanced Application and VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link 2 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network Pavone VLAN Port Setting VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 1 20 38 Static ED Static VLAN g VLAN Status ACTIVE Iv Name Example VLAN Group ID 2 Port Control Tagging Normal v Iv Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal Fixed Forbidden M Tx Tagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging EM E adaina C Normal Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging Normal NEU TETTE x Tagging 12 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 13 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging C bid BS The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 10 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 10 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the
148. ck Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 ARP Table Figure 150 Management ARP Table ORAND Index IP Address MAC Address Type 1 172 21 0 2 00 05 50 04 30 f1 dynamic 2 172 21 3 16 00 05 1c 15 08 71 dynamic 3 172 21 3 18 D0 Ob cd 8c 6d ed dynamic 4 172 21 3 40 00 0c 76 07 41 0d dynamic 5 172 21 3 66 00 50 8d 47 73 4f dynamic 6 172 21 3 90 00 05 50 f4 49 20 dynamic 7 172 21 3 91 00 50 ba ad 55 7c dynamic 8 172 21 3 95 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 dynamic g 172 21 3 120 00 10 b5 ae 62 32 dynamic 10 172 21 3 138 00 a0 c5 b2 52 26 dynamic 11 172 21 4 99 00 0c 76 08 cf 88 dynamic 12 172 21 10 11 08 00 20 ad f5 88 dynamic 13 172 21 100 153 00 90 27 be a2 8c dynamic 14 172 21 207 247 00 0c 75 09 17 1a dynamic 15 192 168 1 1 00 a0 c5 3f 81 56 dynamic 16 182 158 1 5 00 85 30 01 01 04 dynamic 17 192 168 1 10 00 a0 c5 5e df f8 static 18 192 168 1 100 00 85 30 01 01 00 dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Management ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP Table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with corresponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic
149. creen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauthentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay Timer connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide E Chapter 18 P
150. cs LABEL DESCRIPTION Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packets This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packets This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This
151. ctive This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name Bis field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC This field displays the MAC address with the VLAN identification number to which the Address MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column ES 2024 Series User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards EEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 13 1 STP RSTP Overview BS R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while
152. cts you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server
153. d PoE enabled devices on the PoE ports Consuming This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the Power W connected PoE enabled devices Allocated This field displays the total amount of power the Switch has reserved for PoE after Power W negotiating with the connected PoE device s Consuming Power W can be less than or equal but not more than the Allocated Power W Remaining This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE Power W Note The Switch must have at least 16 W of remaining power in order to supply power to a PoE device even if the PoE device needs less than 16W Port This is the port index number State This field shows which ports can receive power from the Switch You can set this in Section 8 8 1 on page 83 Disable The PD connected to this port cannot get power supply Enable The PD connected to this port can receive power ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt PoE Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Class This shows the IEEE 802 3af power classification of the PD This is a number from 0 to 4 where each value represents a range of power W and power current mA that the PD requires to function The ranges are as follows Class 0 Default 0 44 to 12 94 Class 1 Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Class 2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Class 3 Optional 6 49 to
154. d button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance 28 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off The Switch loads configuration one Config 1 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 122 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer xj 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system a Cancel 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration 28 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device O Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 123 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade amp Firmware Upgrade Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and
155. d management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch Filter all traffic to the CPU port Disable all ports Misconfigure the text configuration file Forget the password and or IP address NO oo RR OW Prevent all services from accessing the Switch ES 2024 Series User s Guide r1 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator BS 8 Change a service port number but forget it Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600 bps with 8 data bits no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 2 6 Connect to the console port using a computer with termina
156. d then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those Switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 238 ES 2024 Series User s Guide T
157. d to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B ES 2024 Series User s Guide 131 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Figure 69 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting In this screen activate trunking group T1 and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 70 Trunking Example Configuration Screen Link Aggregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active T2 r T3 E Port Group Cancel Your trun
158. ddress where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access 29 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked Figure 134 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer x Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or Ie changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority o The security certificate date is valid A The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate ES 2024 Series User s Guide 221 Chapter 29 Access Control 29 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from th
159. de Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another ES 2024 Series User s Guide 254 Appendix A Product Specifications Table 101 Feature Descriptions continued FEATURE DESCRIPTION LLDP Link Layer Discovery The LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol is a layer 2 protocol Protocol It allows a network device to advertise its identity and capabilities on the local network It also allows the device to maintain and store information from adjacent devices which are directly connected to the network device This helps an administrator discover network changes and perform necessary network reconfiguration and management The device information is encapsulated in the LLDPDUs LLDP data units in the form of TLV Type Length Value Device information carried in the received LLDPDUS is stored in the standard MIB
160. device 31 access control limitations 209 login account 217 remote management 224 service port 223 SNMP 210 accounting setup 162 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 243 245 246 administrator password 218 age 117 aggregator ID 129 130 aging time 76 alternative subnet mask notation 259 American Wire Gauge 249 applications backbone 31 bridging 32 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 33 Switched workgroup 32 ARP how it works 243 viewing 243 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 243 ARP inspection 171 and MAC filter 172 configuring 172 Syslog messages 172 trusted ports 172 authentication and RADIUS 158 setup 162 authorization privilege levels 165 auto crossover 40 automatic VLAN registration 88 auto negotiating 40 AWG 249 Index B back up configuration file 206 bandwidth control egress rate 122 ingress rate 122 basic settings 71 basic setup tutorial 61 binding 171 binding table 171 building 171 BPDUS Bridge Protocol Data Units 108 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 108 C certifications 265 notices 266 viewing 266 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 87 changing the password 52 CIST 111 CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 109 Class of Service CoS 191 cloning a port See also port cloning 246 cluster management 233 and switch passwords 238 cluster manager 233 237 cluster member 233 238 cluster member firmware upgrade 236 network example 233 setup 236 specification 233 status 234 switch models 233 VID 237 web config
161. ds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost See Table 23 on page 108 for more information Apply Click Apply to sa
162. dth allowed Control from specified source s to specified destination s Broadcast Storm This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwiadth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port Authentication authentication Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast features and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus ES 2024 Series User s Guide LI Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION IP Source Guard
163. e first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts via RADIUS servers configured in the RADIUS Server Setup screen Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts via TACACS servers configured in the TACACS Server Setup screen Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dot1x Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID ass
164. e path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized ARP packets in your network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authentication Authorization and Accounting The Switch supports authentication authorization and accounting services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog server Firmware Upgra
165. e 14 AC Rear Panel Figure 15 DC Rear Panel o 3 2 1 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel To connect the power to the Switch insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to the power source ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 3 LEDs The LEDs are located on the front panel The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel Table 2 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally Ethernet Ports LNK ACT Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down FDX COL Amber Blinking The Ethernet port is negotiating in half duplex mode and ES collisions are occurring the more collisions that occur the faster 2024A the LED blinks On The Ethernet port is negotiating in full duplex mode Off The E
166. e Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 135 Security Certificate 1 Netscape x Unable to verify the identity of E5 20244 0013491ad4fa as a trusted site Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be E5 20244 0013491ad4fa possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identifying the Web site ES 2024A 0013491ad4fa Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site e m Figure 136 Security Certificate 2 Netscape x ES 2024A 0013491ad4fa is a site that uses a security certificate to encrypt data during transmission but its certificate expired on 2 19 1924 1 39 AM You should check to make sure that your computer s time currently set to Thursday May 12 2005 17 46 00 is correct Would you
167. e This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 9 1 on page 87 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 45 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Settings C OSE VLAN Status GVRP m Ingress Check umi Port PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation r A O 1 1 O Al x m 2 hooo r Al Oo m 3 1 0 A T ri m PS ars B r ne ars B B CM E C d d o ecc E M a I 26 n Al z m r Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Ingress Check Select this check box to activate ingress filtering on the Switch Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering the Switch Port This field displays
168. e are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN ES 2024 Series User s Guide Static MAC Forwarding Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 10 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MA
169. e duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that 1f a mini GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled The speed of the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports can be 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex at 100 Mbps or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 10 100 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control off ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are slots for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC ports The mini GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports This means that
170. e for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 14 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process Heb ene Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members ontro Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Re
171. e four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 7 Mounting the Switch on a Rack yy pooooo6 ooooo0oon as 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the MS flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection ES 2024 Series User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel Connection The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch Figure8 Front Panel ES 2024A Console Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Gigabit E
172. e memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values ES 2024 Series User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 24 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 102 Loop Guard vs STP swe e wee eee ee eee ee ee ee ee eee eee m utm m m m mw mmm mma m vu mm eee JW ummmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm t Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re b
173. e route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 Static Route Table 66 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Gateway Address This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 Static Route ES 2024 Series User s Guide Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch 26 1 DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is
174. e this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Figure 36 Basic Setting gt Port Setup N a xI E Por Setup NN Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority SUM e MONI mo ato m ox 1 yf 10 100M Auto 7 r oz 2 y 10 100M At m oz 3 v 10 100M Auto r fo 4 vy 10 100M At y r 0T 5 y 10 100M ato y r o 6 viu 10 100M Aw e r a gt y 10 100M Auto r T rf b t000M Auto Apply Cancel K e The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web config
175. ee the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that second is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Changed Times Time Since Last This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Change 13 5 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 4 on page 109 for more information
176. een Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that second is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communic
177. el com web contact us php Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Required Information Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan China ZyXEL Communications Beijing Corp Support E mail cso zycn zyxel cn Sales E mail sales zyxel cn Telephone 86 010 82800646 Fax 86 010 82800587 Address 902 Unit B Horizon Building No 6 Zhichun Str Haidian District Beijing Web http www zyxel cn China ZyXEL Communications Shanghai Corp e Support E mail cso zycn zyxel cn Sales E mail sales zyxel cn Telephone 86 021 61199055 Fax 86 021 52069033 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support Address 1005F ShengGao International Tower No 137 XianXia Rd Shanghai Web http www zyxel cn Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Ri
178. els in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing Thes
179. ent when one of the device operating parameters such as transceiver temperature laser bias current transmitted optical power received optical power and transceiver supply voltage is above or below a factory set normal range transceiverddmiEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 45 27 2 2 This trap is sent when all device operating parameters return to the normal operating range Table 81 AAA Traps EventOn OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when On 1 8 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password RADIUSNotReachableEve 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no ntOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 response message from the RADIUS server RADIUSNotReachableEve 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS ntClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 Server can be reached accounting RADIUSAcctNotReachable 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADIUSAcctNotReachable EventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2
180. er Information Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following DES Data Encryption Standard is a
181. es to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 21 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen BES A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap ES 2024 Series User s Guide 153 Chapter 21 Multicast Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Multicast g
182. ess Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address information to the Switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Address Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 254 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the Switch IP address This is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port cannot access the device To access the Switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to res
183. et the fields to your previous configuration Management IP Addresses Configure the fields to set additional management IP address IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation For example 255 255 255 0 Mask VID Enter the VLAN identification number Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 1 254 Add Click Add to save the new rule to the Switch It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays the management IP address of the Switch IP Subnet This field displays the subnet mask for the corresponding IP address Mask VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the network Default This field displays the IP address of default gateway Gateway Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 7 Port Setup Us
184. fer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 40 Port VLAN Trunking c 9 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting gt Switch Setup screen Figure 41 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type OXiuuEnsg NN 802 1Q C PaortBased Active r VLAN Type 9 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent toa VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 9 1 on page 87 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 42 Adv
185. file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting check box if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 28 Maintenance 28 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 124 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen below from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 28 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your
186. fore attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the t
187. g Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Differentiated Services 26 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 110 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different traffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows An example traffic policy is to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 110 DiffServ Network P eisie selir iP P Platinum G Gold S Silver B Bronze 26 2 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Differentiated Services Figure 111 IP Application gt DiffServ OPISE DSCP Setting Active E Port Active T 1 O 2 3 E 4 E 5 O 6 E ae CH HMM
188. g membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number 0 255 of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch alwa
189. hat are not reachable through the default gateway The Switch can also use static routes to send data to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway for example when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1 The Switch sends reply traffic to default gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager s computer The Switch needs a static route to tell it to use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2 Figure 107 Static Routing Overview R1 25 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 Static Route Figure 108 IP Application gt Static Routing Static Routing P Active Name Destination IP Address looo IP Subnet Mask ooo Gateway IP Address booo Metric Index Active Name Yes Example 172 2 Destination Address Subnet Mask Add Cancel Clear 14 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel Gateway Address 192 168 1 2 Metric Delete 2 r The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 66 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name
190. he following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix C Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning ESAS ioe SAR alleen Tee EA ete he Ry HIBESERSTSRT ES TEXETETSI T fA E ee KRY ee SH SIR Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003
191. his button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into static entries They also display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click the Transfer button to change all dynamically learned MAC address entries in the summary table below into MAC filtering entries These entries will then display only in the Filtering screen and the default filtering action is Discard source Cancel Click Cancel to change the fields back to their last saved values Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 33 MAC Table Table 97 Management MAC Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 33 MAC Table ES 2024 Series User s Guide ARP Table This
192. his chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 33 1 MAC Table Overview MAC Table The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 TheSwitch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table to that port e If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion If the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 148 MAC Table Flowchart v Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Forward to all ports Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port
193. hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch 21 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANS that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 21 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 21 1 on page 143 for more information on multicasting Figure 77 Advanced Appli
194. ication information about the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual Switch ports PoE Setup This link take you to a screen where you can set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs Advanced Applica tion VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do not age out Static Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast MAC Forwarding addresses for port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MSTP to prevent Protocol network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwi
195. iffServ Firmware Upgrade Static VLAN Restore Configuration Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup PoE Setup Static MAC Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration RSTP MSTP Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Link Aggregation Setting Link Aggregation Control Protocol Port Authentication 802 1x Port Security Queuing Method Multicast Multicast Setting IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Group Configuration AAA RADIUS Server Setup TACACS Server Setup AAA Setup IP Source Guard Static Binding ARP Inspection Status LogStatus Configure Port VLAN Loop Guard DSCP Setting DHCP Global Relay VLAN Setting Backup Configuration Load Factory Default Save Configuration Reboot System Access Control SNMP Trap Group Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Diagnostic Syslog Syslog Server Setup Cluster Management Clustering Management Configuration MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigat ion Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identif
196. igned via the external server Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorization of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s e System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port Telnet or SSH e Dot1x Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting server
197. ing Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch seesee 236 Figure 147 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration sse 237 Figure 149 MAC Table FIDWCHBEU adacssmisitese si be t ee HERI ATI Eon E RE peI IN MIE EET Inde bnt Pre e bI D rU 239 Figure 149 Management gt MAC Table a sisucererssiscuedievs stan eed ee apta suck Fal a er ta deus a ta 240 Figure 150 Management gt ARP Table 1a et npa kde si e a Ennii Saee A ER Ka dL a n EX 244 Figure 151 Management gt Configure CIOFIG iausceseceeieeecenee tior otn ait eere tan p stra E RA 245 Figuie TZ DG Peer PIIG aaiusixdisiienteznd pti RTROHSUAT RU ESSO OREL UNE GERUCH ROLE TUNER HU DAR dE 249 Figure T93 Network Number and Host Bee cT 258 Figure 154 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting eeeeiesscesieseee etes enne 260 Figure 155 Subnetting Example After Subnetting eeeseseseseess eene nennen tnn aan nnnaa 261 ES 2024 Series User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables TAS VAP ORT OLDER 40 ils 20A NIE Xe TD mM NEN 43 Table 3 Navigation Panel Sub lnks Overview occeeossseces ioci tein stack tabe e Ra ree u eR X0 NE FEVER CIN CE Y VH E ouv aN a 49 Table 4 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details essere 50 Table o Novgalon Panel LIIS auspice nosis boU M etate dU PE PN QR PH dada 51 D Jxccu Wem 67 Table 7 Basic Setting gt System IG oa sais sides cendo prev e eri daRk a amaS en peek E
198. ious or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 9 5 2 Static VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status ofthe VLAN group See Section 9 1 on page 87 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Figure 43 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Details VLAN Detail ng VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 Elapsed Time Status 1 3 5 7 9 11 E EEM ES Ug E 23 25 u uWpuwrulw eol u u u uJ uJ u 1 14 58 36 Static U U U U U U U U U U u U The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another wa
199. is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 17 6 on page 131 for a static port trunking example 17 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups When you enable LACP Iink aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops 17 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 33 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch
200. is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 1518 between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size ES 2024 Series User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter desc
201. itch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN 27 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 DHCP Figure 113 P Application gt DHCP Status DHCP Status Global VLAN Relay Status Relay Mode None The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 IP Application gt DHCP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP relay mode Relay Mode This field displays None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 27 3 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP
202. k Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Relay for the DHCP mode DHCP Status This field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 DHCP 27 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 118 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs DHCP 192 168 1 100 DHCP 172 23 10 100 For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 119 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example AVENEDCGDDONENP Statt VID 2 Remote DHCP Server 1 172 23 10 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information E Option 82 Information O ES 2024PWR VID Type DHCP Status Delete Relay 192 168 1 100 F I ES 2024 Series User s Guide
203. k group 1 T1 configuration is now complete you do not need to go to any additional screens 132 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x methods 18 1 Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports IEEE 802 1x authentication in which an authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user This type of authentication uses the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 22 1 2 on page 158 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client ES 2024 Series U
204. l emulation software See Section 3 1 1 on page 40 for details Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key t o enter debug mode Type at1c after the Enter Debug Mode message Wait for the Starting XMODI upload on your terminal EM upload message before activating XMODEM After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch An example is shown below ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 19 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V1 07 04 20 2008 13 38 02 RAM Size 32768 Kbytes FLASH AMD 32M 1 ZyNOS Version V3 70 TX 0 07 11 2006 19 59 04 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode sysname gt atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 49152 bytes received Erasing sysname gt atgo The Switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 20 Web Configur
205. le Rapid Spanning Tree See Section 13 1 on page 107 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 13 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen 112 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP e REE RIA Status Active i Bridge Priority 32768 Hello Time 2 Seconds MAX Age 20 Seconds Forwarding Delay fis Seconds Port Active p c nal ro 5 E E z H Mf ro co co a anaana ang 3E E a ES ON OO amp WN i nm co T e lt 128 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 60 on page 115 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this check box to dis
206. lect a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Table 47 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your chang
207. like to continue anyway View Certificate Cancel Help 29 8 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control Figure 137 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt O A A Qsearch Favorites Ameda B 5 c4 gl Addess lntosif ee m ee ms ZyXEL amp Save Status A Logout B Help MENU a tting OLED Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s Rx KB s Up Time 1 12345678 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 IP Application h pog Fi Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 LEET LLa 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 1052 3092 0 0 0 0 384 0 11 04 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 3329 1066 0 0 384 0 0 0 11 04 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down ST
208. m CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia 272 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support Singapore Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales zyxel es Telephone 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales zyxel se Telephone 46 3 1 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 G teborg Sweden Taiwan e
209. me s to all ports Port This field displays the port number ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Table 44 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snoopin
210. ments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 17 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation In a properly planned network it
211. n 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps ES 2024 Series User s Guide EL Chapter 29 Access Control Table 84 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management Access Control Logins screen Us
212. n an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the Swit
213. n volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Port This field displays the port s within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding ES 2024 Series User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 12 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the MAC addresses and VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to displa
214. nes is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 106 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8bits 255 0 0 0 24 bits 242 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 216_2 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 20102 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 0925 6 Notation Since the mask 1s always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LASTOCTET LASTOCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued sumerweek AUR T eene SERRE
215. netting tf INTERNE 4 192 168 1 0 25 4 W192 168 1 128 ind In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 1s its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 108 Subnet 1 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast
216. nfigure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard Table 64 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatil
217. nges to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 22 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting LES Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 53 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format
218. nt AAA Server 22 1 1 Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 29 on page 209 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA 22 1 2 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 49 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client the authentication Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 22 2 AAA Screens To enable authentication accounting or both on the Switch First configure your authentication server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority and accounting settings Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 90 Advanced Application gt A
219. ntrol gt Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this End Address Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control Table 88 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted HTTP ICMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide 225 Chapter 29 Access Control ES 2024 Series User s Guide
220. od Select Strictly Priority or Weighted Round Robin Scheduling Strict Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q3 has the highest priority and QO the lowest The default queuing method is Strictly Priority Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights When you select Strict Priority it applies to Q3 only with priority over all other queues QO Q2 will use Weighted Round Robin Scheduling Weight When you select Weighted Round Robin Scheduling use the drop down list boxes to choose queue weights 1 15 Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 21 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unica
221. of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 9 on page 76 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 8 PoE Status BS The following screens are available for the ES 2024 PWR model only Some features are only available for the Fast Ethernet ports 1 to 24 Your Switch supports IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet PoE A powered device PD is a device such as an access point or a switch that supports PoE Power over Ethernet
222. ol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 28 8 on page 207 SNMP The device can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 29 3 on page 210 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration ES 2024 Series User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Setthe Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there 1s a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power co
223. oltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed 8 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time Click Basic Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 33 Basic Setting gt General Setup DIECAN System Name ES 2024PWR Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup None v Time Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Time 14 Br 01 UTC New Time hh mm ss 14 Br 01 Current Date 1970 101 101 New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 01 101 Time Zone UTC v Daylight Saving Time Start Date of at End Date of at It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table8 Basic Setting General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 English keyboard characters spaces are allowed Contac
224. on MSTP ES 2024 Series User s Guide 115 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 61 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP r Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Statud Bridge Active Hello Time le seconds MAX Age feo seconds Forwarding Delay fis seconds Maximum hops 128 Configuration Name 0019cb000001 Revision Number o Apply Cancel Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 KLAN Pange Stat Ena Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s Port Active Priority Path Cost Add Cancel Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 62 on page 119 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this check box to disable MSTP on the Switch ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MAX Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU be
225. onfigurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 16 Web Configurator Login Enter Network Password B 2 x D gt Please type your user name and password Site 182 168 1 1 Realm ES 20244 at Sat Jan 01 02 05 23 2000 User Name Password Save this password in your password list Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 17 Web Configurator Home Screen Status ZyXEL y Save Status a Logout BHelp Basic Setting 9 Port Status g Pot Name Link State PD LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s R USUS A 1 Down STOP Of Disabled 81 37 a 0 0 IP Application 2
226. ooping 143 MVR 149 IGMP throttling 146 ingress check 93 ingress port 97 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 264 introduction 31 IP interface 77 setup 77 IP source guard 171 ARP inspection 171 static bindings 171 L LACP 127 System priority 131 timeout 131 LEDD 43 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 127 link aggregation 127 dynamic 127 ID information 128 setup 129 130 status 128 lockout 53 log 227 login 47 password 52 login accounts 217 Administrator 217 configuring via web configurator 217 multiple 217 non administrator 218 number of 217 login password 218 loop guard 181 how it works 182 port shut down 183 probe packet 182 vs STP 181 MAC Media Access Control 72 MAC address 72 243 learning 137 138 maximum number per port 139 static 137 MAC address learning 76 99 specify limit 139 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 277 Index 278 MAC filter and ARP inspection 172 MAC freeze 138 MAC table 239 display criteria 240 how it works 239 transfer type 240 viewing 240 maintenance 203 configuration backup 206 current configuration 203 firmware 205 main screen 203 restoring configuration 206 Management Information Base MIB 210 management IP address DHCP setup 78 management port 97 management VID 79 managing the device good habits 34 using FTP See FTP using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using
227. op navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number ES 2024 Series User s Guide Ch
228. ort Authentication ES 2024 Series User s Guide Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 19 1 Port Security Overview BS Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch See Chapter 10 on page 99 for information on configuring static MAC address forwarding For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated Functionally the Switch allows for three possible outcomes with port security You can configure the ports to Forward all packets and learn all MAC addresses Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and do not learn MAC addresses Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and learn a limited number of MAC addresses The Switch supports five possible configurations for port security See Section 19 3 on page 139 for supported configurations and an example 19 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Port Security OLED MAC Freeze Port List MAC freeze Port Security Active E Port Active Address Learning Limi
229. owing figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Figure 82 MVR Multicast Television Example Sees Am eB RE GE ee GN GS ee ee RO OP Multicast VLAN easnsu eee e VLAN 1 Sm A erya yyy 21 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multi
230. pe NANRAM R URS aue a RI RR RNNR ASA In S Ka npo KON US RENS NM SNR KE REA 123 15 1 Broadcast Storm COMBO Salir 4 5 2 p tet rep E epa t etii pnta ab xia rbd edi ge 123 Chapter 16 oaeiai ERE UT T ILE 125 16 1 sd unsEiu 125 Chapter 17 Link Aggregatori M 127 17 1 Link Aggregation Overview eeaxecccni aet endure ner iot en A UI a d a KE Eo E EL ARAM CE ad 127 17 2 dup 127 12 2 T Lk OO SOOO IDE sai obe eH Ra RED LER Mo Fiet t ab p Pata an Terese FRE AR rer 128 11 8 LINE lseprprurkerai M 128 T74 Lik Agoregaton Getin P M 129 17 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol aiias te seceeat abad tta ennnen baa tk Y da En rt d ib Ra 130 Tr A Sil MTA E pE auiczptoxnakbrnoqu da Fes URES HEU QUSMERFEDINd a 131 Chapter 18 Part Auth nca oli assi cue RE Aiwa Eel ERE eR Hakirlen sivc uar 2M PHIMRrMM E rEN DN REM eIUEMR 133 18 1 Port Auten beation OVirmiewW sacarosa avec ge zt tpa p extr a Luder ete quisi seed 133 189 11 EEE 802 1 quu ed sists 1 RTT 133 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 18 2 Pom Authentication Configuratio sosai Pot REEF TAS n prre Lpxr ed ERU va SUR To E 134 158 2 1 Activate IEEE GUC DCOOOHHEY csiceedidadkvt xa nindin uniin iaaa R2 CPP PAP GE Eh 134 Chapter 19 Fort SOGUIIG 137 19 1 Port Security OVOlIVIGW Lauuisicscesescssuuecceuscuuumt tuse siut eusec
231. peed department servers via the Switch You can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application Q I I m eee RD Sales a Li i 1 1 1 n i L n E L ME s m m m m m m mm mmm V Sass eee mo m m mom m m eee 1 1 3 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other 32 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Figure 3 High Performance Switched Workgroup Application o E e o eee eee ee m m m m m u T See ee ncm m m m m m m m m m 4 Te eee ee ee ee m m n um m 09 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1
232. ping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 21 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen a
233. ple k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words ES 2024 Series User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device Switch Computer Notebook computer Server Firewall Telephone Switch Router ES 2024 Series User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings gt For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions e e e e e Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting ca
234. plication gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION ru PIE Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest Priority System priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deeme
235. port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes 1 255 a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 10 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen Figure 139 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management Remote Management Secured Client Setup Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 Ww ono o WwW FW NM HF BR PB 2 pn ooo poo O 0 0n 0 0 o n 3 n aoo foe o o on oo n oO n 4 DE loo booo o o o OOO oO Access Control Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Management gt Access Co
236. ports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Figure 81 MVR Network Example F VLAN 1 Sa SB BE eB eB Ee ee eee ee Multicast VLAN eeeeeee VLAN 2 m pannnnnnn I L VLAN 3 lm mmmmmmmm see ew ew ee ee eee eee 21 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 21 6 2 MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 21 6 3 How MVR Works The foll
237. r changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 2024 Series User s Guide Static Multicast Forwarding Use these screens to configure static Multicast address forwarding 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multi
238. rap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 29 3 3 on page 211 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 3 6 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time
239. rate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 90 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message siol aj AJ ofj N gt o Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 31 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 31 Syslog Figure 141 Management gt Syslog e Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active M Logging type Active Facility System Iv localuse 0 Interface Vv local use 0 v Switch Vv local use 0 AAA Vv localuse 0
240. rd 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet ES 2024 Series User s Guide 35 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection BS Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four MS flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver LES Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up th
241. re 56 MS Tis in Different RegionS eR 111 Figure 57 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example ccscsccccsccicsssncceuss veanncneurtiacactunsteneceweuvieneccuui nina 111 Figure 58 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration sesssessss 112 Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP sss 113 Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP sss T15 Figure 61 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP sss 116 Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP 119 Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control esses 121 Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control 123 Figure 65 Advanced Application gt MIFFOFIDI iius errato eer ttu ER bar Ya Eb baa que Mad PY ER bbb R IRAM ena 125 Figure 66 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status ssse 128 Figure 67 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 129 Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 130 Figure 69 Trunking Example Physical Connections ssssssseee enne 132 Figure 70 Trunking Example Configuration Sereen secet eopp ag sn E EpPp a X SEEE MEAT Ra 2E EVA SNRAEE FEL
242. re forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Figure 28 Tutorial Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2 OMELET Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP E Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation r re w s r z 1 fi A gt 0 0 0 0fO O 0 0 0 0 0 iil ls ho a E 4 4 DiDnimmEnrn 4 0 0 0 0f a iti 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 1 3 Configuring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application gt DHCP and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the Information check boxes 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Figure 29 Tutorial Set DHCP Server and Relay Information E DHCP Relay J Status Active v Remote DHCP Server 1 2168823 Remote DHCP Server 2 pooo Remote DHCP Server 3 booo Relay Agent Information V Option 82 Information v ES 2024 Apply Cancel ES 2024 Se
243. re screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 23 5 2 on page 179 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 23 5 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard Figure 99 ARP Inspection Configure Active Filter Aging Time Filter aging time Log Profile Log buffer size Syslog rate Log interval OF Inspection Configure Rz o VLAN ARP Inspection r 300 seconds 32 entries 5 entries 1 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packe
244. re summary 50 file transfer using FTP command example 207 filename convention configuration 207 filtering 105 rules 105 filtering database MAC table 239 firmware 72 upgrade 205 236 flow control 81 back pressure 81 IEEE802 3x 81 forwarding delay 117 frames tagged 94 untagged 94 freestanding installation 35 front panel 39 FTP 34 207 file transfer procedure 207 restrictions over WAN 208 G GARP 88 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 88 GARP terminology 88 GARP timer 76 88 GBIC 41 connection speed 41 connector type 41 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Index interface type 41 transceiver installation 41 transceiver removal 41 general setup 73 Gigabit Ethernet port 40 Gigabit Interface Converter See GBIC 41 Gigabit GBIC combo port 40 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 74 GVRP 88 93 94 and port assignment 94 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 88 H hardware connection 39 hardware installation freestanding 35 rack mounting 36 hardware monitor 72 hello time 117 help web configurator 55 hops 117 HTTPS 220 certificates 220 example 221 implementation 220 public keys private keys 220 humidity 249 IANA 264 IEEE 802 1p priority 76 IEEE 802 1x activate 134 160 162 port authentication 133 reauthentication 135 IGMP version 143 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 143 IGMP filtering 143 profile 148 profiles 145 IGMP leave timeout fast 146 mormal 146 IGMP sn
245. reshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 7 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum v
246. ribes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 8 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes 8 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Figure 32 Basic Setting System Info xicclucN Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status CPU 30 0 30 0 29 0 85 0 Normal MAC 27 0 27 0 27 0 75 0 Normal LOCAL 29 0 29 0 29 0 75 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 6521 6529 6345 3000 Normal FAN2 6150 6164 6136 3000 Normal
247. ribes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt PoE Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION PoE Mode Select the power management mode you want the Switch to use Classification Select this if you want the Switch to reserve the Max Power mW to each PD according to the priority level If the total power supply runs out PDs with lower priority do not get power to function Consumption Select this if you want the Switch to manage the total power supply so that each connected PD gets a resource However the power allocated by the Switch may be less than the Max Power mW of the PD PDs with higher priority also get more power than those with lower priority levels Port This is the port index number PD Select this to provide power to a PD connected to the port If left unchecked the PD connected to the port cannot receive power from the Switch PD Priority This field is only available on the PWR model but not available for the Gigabit or mini GBIC ports When the total power requested by the PDs exceeds the total PoE power budget on the Switch you can set the PD priority to allow the Switch to provide power to ports with higher priority Select Critical to give the highest PD priority on the port Select High to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical priority ports are served Select Low to set the Switch to assign the remaining power to the port after all critical and
248. ries User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 7 The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request 6 1 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure 1 Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 2 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch 3 You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials ES 2024 Series User s Guide System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens T 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 7 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status in any web configurator screen to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 30 Status Port Status Port Name Link State PD LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s Rx KB s UpTime 1 Down STOP Off Disabled 31 37 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 100M F FORWARDING Off Disabled 14061 13661 0 0 0 0 0 0 44 14 3 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Off Disabled 7222 5590 0
249. roadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Loop Guard The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 103 Switch in Loop State A T a N The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 104 Loop Guard Probe Packet The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns
250. s 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control 2 Encryption Method Once the identification 1s verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 29 6 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 29 6 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 29 7 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over
251. s and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 23 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard Figure 96 IP Source Guard Static Binding ONSET NEN IPSG e MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port i Any Add Cancel Clear index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 IP Source Guard Static Binding
252. s Control gt SNMP _ ce cc eeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenes 215 Table 85 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group sess 217 Table 86 Management gt Access Control gt Logins sccncisidaceierancacataepaorectetniesren dined ecaieteduen RR HE ndn nk nnana 218 Table 87 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control 224 Table 88 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management sse 224 Table oo Management DISOHOSIC iiuusonsspsakrenisa For RE niga Hope ENSE e Fr E dE ERR ENS tE TERRA ERERE RUN 227 Table 90 Syslog Seven LOVES uc iri rdi preti na bee vd dd do d d din bad tb dece mace 229 Table 91 Management gt Syslog oisaue paca rinii qaia pa deb anda To pu ZR hod pa Dd thee 230 Table 92 Management gt Syslog gt Server SOLD 22 epu rr os nep eR rd RUE ERR FR ea Vra 1dU Ea PAR CU ADDERE EER 231 Table 93 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications 233 Table 94 Management gt Cluster Management wsissiciccedissscieesincstteneadesessneeavecestenesdedstteesasdaatheneaduaetnnmacs 235 Table 85 FIP Upload to Cluster Member Example i decenter va aua south a ond ER FEE enue khoa dne 236 Table 96 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration 237 Table 97 Management MAC Tablo senisest kinnin anina e EEYRPH S ee eHp Dn nl pErd edd a Erro en dE REL IdR 240 Table 98 Management ARP Table 151r rrt Ir RP PELLIS o LE I a rd EFE rta d 1S n
253. s User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized ARP packets in your network 23 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives an ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network 23 1 1 ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 94 Example Man in the middle Attack ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things t pretends
254. s at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select Start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session e stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA Table 52 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your cha
255. s between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer mapping Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the following fields to configure the priority level to physical queue The Switch has four physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The standard which in following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d corporates the 802 1p ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DE
256. s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch 32 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen 236 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 32 Cluster Management Figure 147 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration Clustering Management Configuration NN Status Clustering Manager Active Vv Name Master VID fi Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 GS 2024 List Password Add Cancel Refresh index MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spa
257. s field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 6 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 4 on page 109 for more information on MSTP BES This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 62 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Status MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349aefb7a 8000 001349aefb7a Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 For wat ding Delay second 15 15 Cost to Bridge 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 Configuration Name 001349aefb7a Revision Number 0 Configuration Digest A317523DB32DA2D62 Topology Changed Time 0 Time Since Last Change 0 Instance Instance VLAN 0 1 4094 Msr Bridge Regional Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 internal Cost 0 0 Port ID Ox0000 0x0000 The following table describes the labels in this scr
258. s shown Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile ED IGMP Filtering Profile g Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address 224 0 0 0 Add Clear Profile Name Start Address End Address Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Delete Cancel End Address 224 0 0 0 Delete Profile r Multicast Setting Delete Rule ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your ch
259. s used MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 2 This trap is sent when less than 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 95 of the MAC table is used rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 15 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold 29 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen go back to the Access Control screen You can click Access Control to ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control Figure 128 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP OED General Setting Version v2c m Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Access Control Trap Group Trap Destination Version vec Vi vec gt vec 7 Port Username User Information 1 Index Username Security Level Authentication Privacy admin noauth MDs DES j Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP versio
260. sa ep e PA TPERGRPRUISM Ea RUE EI PR ASERARRPPLASM nf dds 62 Figure 26 Tutorial Create a Static VLAN ussporecniiesr teet nenne a ipe nad RP CRM E XI E RARI KARMA CR dA 63 Figure 27 Tutorial Click the VLAN Port Setting LINK iecit tete sninek 63 Figure 28 Tutorial Add Tag for Frames Received on Port 2 ooo ccesccccceeseccccceeeseccecenenseccecensseaceeenensaas 64 Figure 29 Tutorial Set DHCP Server and Relay Information nnne 64 Figure SO pco 67 Figure J1 Slows For Delais Seem Fr 69 Figure 32 Basic Soling SySlomi EG srenenininsiie an die T2 Figure 33 Basic Selling General SEDE iiusctissecexerios pex sls tao a bip da o Pla a Wd dd a prx sa 73 Figura 34 Basic Setting v Switch Setup 21cm ced Spa citi Rp cdl pact ull eo ER RR EK Dead 76 Figure 35 Basic Setting gt IP SeU T 78 Figure 26 Basic Salling Port SEDUD dancuresiivnetainmnxnannniaenimusn nmin hanna aces 80 Figure oF Fowered Devices EXaIiplets sniniscenceecciaiaenccsuamies madera EE A E ERR NR EH eee 81 Figure 38 Basic Setting gt PoE Sigs 225 ridi eerte pt bbv eura ttd iaiki das tL up risa pi exco a 82 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 21 List of Figures Figure 239 Basic Setang PUE SEM auussisesectstidesteamiv bte rto f o URS A REPOS PROAEN NER LORI LN A PE dg 84 Figure Mosca ivo TU ri E DTE 89 Figure 41 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type Luise rie eter vite ei vt Di i ec ra ted
261. sccccsuxspecr iet HEP IAEUARHEORGUARFRU DEROEAY PELBSAUR FG RO PEL CEN IA 58 5 1 3 Configuring Switch Management IP Address eeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeetn naa 59 Chapter 6 HIDlr ce 61 6 1 How to Use DACP Relay on the Swit secs cctsccecs iesu ze cer eeen sutor eon tn na ect naa E een acp opera 61 6 1 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction uisus ee debeas eret tir bu nr kd tt erba ntc ni 61 ole Grau Se VLAN aeaea a 61 GTS Comigunno DACP Relay deieiesdi nier piedi trt ba ede oi eia Hed et do nea pe CORR ELLA 64 G1 HOUBSSDODOUD ation items Sat dle seta actu a aah ged tigles Ep dA p Rd 65 Chapter 7 System Status and Port SUS Leser pat exkkl ku ura inaina AE DE b UC DU NA M DAEFE DII P IRR RER 67 FA ORIG on 67 FOU SOUS OHNE caeca tende pits edite pete ablab amen atin e e pomi V pbi a 67 pe Pape esa Bi tc ammerereme spree met nem terme tere erate anrrer erat S 68 12 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 8 Basie SIE aeaiiai c Hb e AEUMASEB AF URIRE UMANE MEER aE NA M RUNI ER MMKA LN DUM AA 71 e TLF anui ccrte tli a n ilo uote aa a E pei t udutu 71 G 2 SYSIOM IMPOTMGMOM a t 71 Boo DONEUSIDBDU A nace E SER a ta Hec d A OOE OE TE E Es tav odd 73 8 3 InFroducton to YLANG aan ne eerie E MEM RPMUMM MI TIS Do RW SNP SOCON anonnsienenidbepaidbo ird rm etta i pon Hiro too end 75 EDIDI aiaa ateri eine ness Mesi neqne Iudei ddde 77 SEA Mg Me eane ne eein ne Enin E
262. ser s Guide software Chapter 18 Port Authentication Figure 71 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process Client AAA Server New Connection Login Info Request FF l Login Credentials 4 Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA gt Radius Server Setup screen Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication IATE 802 1x Click here 18 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x OE Ara Port Authentication Active O Port Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer li O on l seconds 1 O On 3600 seconds 2 O on a600 seconds 3 On 3600 seconds 4 E on gt 5600 seconds 5 E on o500 seconds 6 E 7 O o 5 4 p 600 seconds D seconds i Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this s
263. slog messages every second 6invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 10 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Enter how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 23 5 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 100 ARP Inspection Port Configure l ARP Inspection Port Configure Configure Port Trusted State Untusted Unrustec f Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untusted Untrusted Untrusted MI OPM amp wih ntrusted Apply Cancel ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen
264. so that it can receive power from another device through a 10 100Mbps Ethernet port In the figure below the IP camera and IP phone get their power directly from the Switch Aside from minimizing the need for cables and wires PoE removes the hassle of trying to find a nearby electric outlet to power up devices Figure 37 Powered Device Examples ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting You can also set priorities so that the Switch is able to reserve and allocate power to certain PDs To view the current amount of power that PDs are receiving from the Switch click Basic Setting gt PoE Setup Figure 38 Basic Setting PoE Status PoE Status d PoE Setup PoE Mode Classification Total Power W 185 0 Consuming Power W 0 0 Allocated Power VW 0 0 Remaining Power W 185 0 i Consuming Max Current Port State Class PD Priority Max Power mW Power mW mA 1 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 2 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 3 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 4 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 5 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 6 Enable 0 Low 0 0 0 0 RU e eS eae Low 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt PoE Status LABEL DESCRIPTION PoE Status PoE Mode This field displays the power management mode used by the Switch whether it is in Classification or Consumption mode Total Power This field displays the total power the Switch can provide to the connecte
265. ss A CE EMC Class A ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications ES 2024 Series User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet 1s an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 1111
266. ss Space ES 2024 Series User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright O 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimers ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Your use of the Switch 1s subject to the terms and conditions of any related service providers Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Class A without wireless Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to t
267. st 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 21 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 21 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 21 1 3 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast
268. st octet values for each subnet Table 112 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 127 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 112 Eight Subnets continued SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 113 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO NOSTS PER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 114 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NOST ERE SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 2
269. st the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 22 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 AAA 22 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 55 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y lt NAS Identifier NAS IP Address Service Type Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic lt lt lt lt Acct Session Time lt lt lt lt lt lt Acct Terminate Cause lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Table 56 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name Y Y lt NAS Identifier NAS IP Address Service Type Calling Station Id Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time
270. t Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration OFM MVR Multicast VLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MVLAN Name Start Address Add Cancel End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 21 1 1 on page 143 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 21 1 1 on page 143 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLA
271. t The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Enter O if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 23 4 1 on page 175 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 IP Source Guard Table 62 ARP Inspection Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 31 on page 229 to use this Enter O if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 sy
272. t has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Queuing Method Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 20 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method DIETMAR Strictly Priority C Weighted Round Robin Scheduling Q0 Weight Q1 Weight Q2 Weight Q3 Weight Method alajaina Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Meth
273. t Person s Name Enter the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 English keyboard characters spaces are allowed Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displa
274. t auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast Table 45 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snoo
275. t it rct fl RH t RR SAU 153 21 5 1 MYR Configuration Example 22e oce derent toto i n i a ea C teta nti FR eet pae 154 Chapter 22 AAA Trece 157 22 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA ssssseeeeee 157 2a LOCS USEF re CRT m UT 157 22 1 2 RADIUS and TAL ADS auioiesdqiie c MERDA N PREMO en EP UD ARAM 158 262 MIU SBIBBRS sso io Sees ape ek ae aed od eio ua as D UL eon DRE Re RU 158 22 2 1 RADIUS Server SOWIE asses eodd bre ta ER B Hamat dead miata Lu a boul LU 158 2242 VAGACS Sever Gellii ucnesusxeseestivevisseuistaxrstvisisess eexib sep ei inar MOLD Ep MIU E eife 160 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 15 Table of Contents 222 2 ANA SEU nsi ve o E t Een tC i FE et E RR RU C E ed 162 22 24 Vendor pog AID users Erb rtr t ERR D EU EFE EE ERA bRL HE EFE CES EAE MEE EAER L2 RR Y pa 165 22 3 Supported RADIUS AIBIBS i2 irceic titt p rr I en rta a DUE rnt ebNe naasi aak o 166 22 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication uiuo oed E ta idR ore e oo XR Ro Pee i 167 22 3 2 Attributes Used Tor ACCOUNING sicreta aE en ERE AE a a RsDpUE 167 Chapter 23 IP SOURCE GIG e MI 171 23 LIP Sours Du QUBUVIBIM sacs pr ote DU ib og PR ob Da E E REX 171 23 1 1 ARP Inspection Overview 2 5 cond posce cL pee eU REP te brc bkn e pn ad E DNO x E Lava d p 171 29 2 IP SOURCE CUEING rr 173 23 3 IP Source Guard ASS BINON unigssccxsdisptce existat SU POOR HR MORALE PR
276. t or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty 1s the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com ES 2024 Series User s Guide 267 Appendix C Legal Information ES 2024 Series User s Guide Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device Regional offices are listed below see also http www zyx
277. t path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 13 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port 1s not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 24 STP Port S
278. tates PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUS are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 13 1 4 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region 13 1 4 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANS are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link
279. te Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click
280. te er cence a sc e etam t rey 207 Boos icu e D 207 289 27 FIP Command Line PEOGBIUEG suissscccscxiiseevbons iino taa sin cta dii tus nue 207 28 0 3 GUl based FTP Clients occas can nacana cesanqesundccnaaautuncndasieas knna Ea EO ENNE annain ERANSUS EEA 208 26 04 dicus T nn AEri N n E AEA i 208 Chapter 29 PCCOSS Control e 209 29 1 Access Control OvernvioW Ur 209 29 2 The Actess Control Mali SCioGi neccsser 0500 5 02005 00 05 00 RS 209 Z8 9 PRI sirai aaan AA AA deus 210 29 3 1 SNMP V3 and ONY rnicraii rnise ania a hae aa boa aiei aaa 211 29 3 2 Supported 211 POSS SNMP TADS eraa sd ereysNiaageredeuasdaeusatteann 211 zd C Omon GNI seansi NA 214 29 3 0 Configuring SNMP Trap GrOUD assesses esei io bii tei aaa ria 216 29 3 6 Setting Up Login ACCOM acceda bein Road kind di ad ora dax dd aad ux 217 PORE RAC l Aer 219 bglicEc lb c m N 219 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 29 6 SSA Implementation onm the SIRO eiue tr sa I EX IE PP PH e ERE a tesa rud 220 29 6 1 Requirements Tor Using SSH Lccasesctxcten ker tb nra eI EE retinut ERE CL in d or tir ka ECL pde 220 29 7 mniroducton to HTIPS sisi svencciiusvaancaooe M 220 ee RI Te 05 Mee US 221 29 8 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ecrit etr bati etra Pese ate nanan 221 29 8 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages 0 ccccccssseecosssse
281. ted Number of Learned MAC Address i m IV 1 m IV fo 2 O I o 3 rH IV o 4 n IV o 5 O Vv o 6 O IV o m IV lo Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 39 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on the Switch Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this
282. ter Member Switch C NV ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 58 46 1970 User 192 168 1 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp 1s 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W Ww wW 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config w w wWw 1 owner group O Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 rw rw rw 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File sent OK ftp 297 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 200 Type I OK ftp put 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 226 File received OK ftp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec ftp The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 95 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3601t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch
283. the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Figure 26 Tutorial Create a Static VLAN Xin ND ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Normal 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 2 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 5 Q al C C Fordde 24 amp Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 26 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 27 Normal C Fixed Forbidden 28 Normal C Fixed Forbidden Add Cancel Clear VLAN Status Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging T Tagging M Tx Tagaing M TxTadging M Tx Tagaing Iv Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging v Tx Tagging Iv Tx Tagging 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 27 Tutorial Click the VLAN Port Setting Link ED VLAN Statu S g VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time 1 1 49 52 07 2 102 0 00 15 Change Pages Previous Next VLAN Port Settin Search Static VLAN Status Static Static 9 Enter 102 in the PVID field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames a
284. the port number ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them PVID Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All and Tag Only Frame Type Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navig
285. the web configurator See web configurator man in the middle attacks 171 max age 117 hops 117 MIB and SNMP 210 supported MIBs 211 MIB Management Information Base 210 mini GBIC See GBIC 41 mirroring ports 125 monitor port 125 126 MSA 41 MST Instance See MSTI 111 MST region 110 MSTI 111 MST ID 111 MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance 109 MSTP 107 109 bridge ID 119 120 configuration 115 configuration digest 120 forwarding delay 117 Hello Time 119 hello time 117 Max Age 119 max age 117 max hops 117 MST region 110 network example 109 path cost 118 port priority 118 revision level 117 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 107 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 75 multicast 143 802 1 priority 145 and IGMP 143 IGMP throttling 146 IP addresses 143 overview 143 setup 144 145 multicast group 148 multicast VLAN 153 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 109 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 107 Multiple STP see MSTP 109 MVR 149 configuration 151 group configuration 153 network example 149 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 149 N NAT 264 network management system NMS 210 NTP RFC 1305 74 P password 52 administrator 218 PHB Per Hop Behavior 191 ping test connection 227 port authentication 133 and RADIUS 158 IEEE802 1x 134 160 162 port based VLAN type 76 port cloning 245 246 advanced settings 245 246 basic settings 245 246 port connection 39 port details 68 port isolation
286. thernet Mini GBIC Ports Figure9 Front Panel ES 2024PWR Console Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC Ports ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 1 Front Panel LABEL DESCRIPTION CONSOLE Only connect this port if you want to configure the Switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port 24 10 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Ports Gigabit Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet Ethernet mini switches or use them to daisy chain other switches GBIC ports Alternatively use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber optical connections to backbone Ethernet switches 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Ethernet Ports The Switch has 24 10 100 Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 10 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and th
287. thernet port is negotiating in half duplex mode and no collisions are occurring POE Amber On Power is supplied to the port PNE Off Power is not supplied to the port Gigabit Ports 100 1000 Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down ACT Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data On The port has a connection to an Ethernet network but not receiving or transmitting data Off The link to an Ethernet network is down Mini GBIC Ports LNK Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port ACT Green Blinking The port is sending or receiving data Off The port is not sending or receiving data ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview ES 2024 Series User s Guide PART II Basic Configuration The Web Configurator 47 Initial Setup Example 57 Tutorials 61 System Status and Port Statistics 67 Basic Setting 71 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web c
288. tion 71 system log 227 System reboot 205 T TACACS 158 setup 160 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 157 tagged VLAN 87 temperature 249 temperature indicator 72 time current 74 time zone 74 Time RFC 868 74 time server 74 time service protocol 74 format 74 trademarks 265 Transceiver MultiSource Agreement See MSA 41 traps destination 215 trunk group 127 trunking 127 example 131 trusted ports ARP inspection 172 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 166 tutorials 61 Type of Service ToS 191 U untrusted ports ARP inspection 172 user profiles 157 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA 165 ventilation 36 ventilation hole 36 VID 87 90 91 number of possible VIDs 87 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Index priority frame 87 VID VLAN Identifier 87 VLAN 75 87 acceptable frame type 94 automatic registration 88 ID 87 ingress filtering 93 introduction 75 management VID 79 number of VLANs 90 port number 91 port settings 93 port based VLAN 94 port based all connected 97 port based isolation 97 port based wizard 97 static VLAN 91 status 90 91 tagged 87 trunking 89 94 type 76 89 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 75 VSA 165 W warranty 267 note 267 web configurator 34 47 getting help 55 home 48 login 47 logout 55 navigation panel 49 screen summary 50 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 141 WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 141 Z
289. tion Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports 7 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Figure 31 Status Port Details Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution e Port Details Port Status Port NO 1 Name Link Down Status STOP LACP Disabled TxPkts 31 RxPkts 37 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s D Up Time 0 TX Packets 31 Multicast 0 Broadcast 7 Pause 0 RX Packets 37 Multicast Broadcast Pause Single Multiple Ex
290. to be computer A and responds to computer B t pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them 23 1 1 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 12 on page 105 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 23 1 1 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports if the sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings 23 1 1 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 31 on page 229 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send
291. tup Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry
292. ued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION voltage VoltageEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the voltage goes above or below the normal operating range VoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets ControlledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch fails to get the time and date froma time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server intrusionloc IntrusionLockEventOn k 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 27 27 2 1 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 16 27 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 8
293. urator 235 cluster manager 233 cluster member 233 command interface 34 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 109 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 111 configuration 189 change running config 205 file names 207 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 275 Index 276 configuration file 54 backup 206 restore 54 206 saving 204 configuration saving 53 connect power 42 console port connector 40 default setting 40 copying port settings See also port cloning 246 copyright 265 CPU management port 95 current date 74 current time 74 D daylight saving time 74 DHCP 195 configuration options 195 modes 195 relay agent 195 relay example 200 setup 198 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 195 diagnostics 227 Ethernet port test 227 ping 227 system log 227 Differentiated Service DiffServ 191 DiffServ 191 activate 192 DS field 191 DSCP 191 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 193 network example 192 PHB 191 disclaimer 265 DNS 78 Domain Name System See also DNS 78 DS Differentiated Services 191 DSCP DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 193 service level 191 what it does 191 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 191 dual personality port 40 dynamic link aggregation 127 E egress port 97 Ethernet broadcast address 243 Ethernet port 40 auto crossover 40 auto negotiating 40 default setting 40 Ethernet port test 227 Ethernet ports 40 external authentication server 158 F fan speed 72 FCC interference statement 265 featu
294. urator screens Type This field displays 10 100M for an Ethernet Fast Ethernet connection and 10 100 1000M for Gigabit connections Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port Choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex and 1000M Full Duplex for Gigabit ports only Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth
295. uthentication 216 communities 215 management model 210 manager 210 MIB 211 network components 210 object variables 210 protocol operations 210 security 216 setup 214 traps 216 version 3 and security 211 versions supported 210 SNMP traps 211 supported 211 212 213 214 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 107 SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing 141 SSH encryption methods 220 how it works 219 implementation 220 ES 2024 Series User s Guide 279 Index SSH Secure Shell 219 SSL Secure Socket Layer 220 standby ports 127 static bindings 171 static MAC address 99 137 static MAC forwarding 99 static multicast address 101 static multicast forwarding 101 static routes 187 189 static trunking example 131 Static VLAN 91 static VLAN control 92 ingress check 93 tagging 92 status 48 67 LED 43 link aggregation 128 port 67 port details 68 power 73 STP 114 118 VLAN 90 STP 107 bridge ID 115 bridge priority 113 configuration 112 115 designated bridge 108 forwarding delay 114 Hello BPDU 108 Hello Time 113 115 how it works 108 Max Age 113 115 path cost 108 114 port priority 114 port state 109 root port 108 status 114 118 terminology 107 vs loop guard 181 Strictly Priority Queuing SPQ 141 subnet 257 subnet mask 258 subnetting 260 Switch lockout 53 switch reset 54 Switch setup 75 syntax conventions 4 Syslog 172 229 protocol 229 server setup 230 settings 229 setup 229 severity levels 229 system informa
296. ve 2 spanning tree instances Figure 56 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 2 13 1 4 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANS that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 57 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link 13 2 Spanning Tree Configuration Screen Use this screen to select the STP mode for the Switch To open this screen click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration ES 2024 Series User s Guide t Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 58 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration mE Spanning tree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree or Multip
297. ve your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 107 for more information on RSTP BS This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0X0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tr
298. vide cdd Edd 89 Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status ssssssssssseeeeeneeemememntenennn 90 Figure 43 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Details sssssseI Re 91 Figure 44 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN ou cccccecceeeeeeeccncceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 92 Figure 45 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Settings 93 Figure 46 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected 95 Figure 47 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation 96 Figure 48 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding eee enn 99 Figure 49 Ma Static Multicast FOPOal Ig suae eet rro ttu rtu E torninu vecmessers demmnassed cbr YE E aaaea ER Deed 101 Figure 50 Static Mutlicast Forwarding to A Single POL 1t rena pen ti hene 101 Figure 51 Static Muilicast Forwarding to Multiple POIs 1 conterere bebe pretia da Forte va d ek ben texas da k EM NA SERRUEA 102 Figure 52 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding essem 102 Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Filtering usce tercero e npa Ead a Kc x E p RR Kd ng ac 105 Figure 54 STF RSTP Netwoik EXGIDDIS secari tet ne te d eet bu etti ken b rina Scop ae ubr Ev ebd bote TEM ER RE ates 110 Figuie 55 MSTP Nowak EXONS iicisesissssck io I4 REP ernia a RED PRU RR ELE ELS E RR UR ERR 110 Figu
299. widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 29 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP screen click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control Figure 129 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group Trap Group J SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP m Type Options System CO coldstart C warmstart C fanspeed C temperature C voltage C reset CO timesync C intrusionlock C loopguard Interface O linkup O linkdown C autonegotiation O idp O transceiver ddm AMAA C authentication O accounting IP C ping C traceroute Switch O stp CO mactable CO rmon The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt T
300. word Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have privilege level 0 basic read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 English keyboard characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Access Control 29 4 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 131 SSH Communication Example N VERN eJ gt e onnection SSH Server SSH Client 29 5 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 132 How SSH Work
301. x ete 109 Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration 112 Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP ssssssssssee 113 Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP sssssssssssss 115 Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP eee 116 Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP sess 119 Table 30 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control eessssssssssseeeneenenenn nnn 121 Table 31 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control sese 124 Table 32 Advanced Application gt NIEFORBO iuiecexxr pretii urit Feseca a E REIHE nEKEEERI NAE RFEE RI ex X FEFRI I COEM ERE XA a FIRM 126 Table 39 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch 1 c ox HA bar dd ER Fr epe a n ELLE var etia Dodd 128 Table 34 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch sssssssssssssssessssese eene nennen nnne 128 Table 35 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status emm 128 Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 129 Table 37 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 131 Table 38 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1Xx sssssseseseeeeenenenne 135
302. y such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 9 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 9 1 on page 87 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Figure 44 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN Static VLAN VLAN Status ACTIVE M Name VLAN Group ID Port Control Tagging Normal IV Tx Tagging 1 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden IV Tx Tagging 2 8 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden IV Tx Tagging 3 8 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 4 8 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden IV Tx Tagging 5 8 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden IV Tx Tagging 6 8 Norma Fixed Forbidden IV Tx Tagging 7 Norma Forbidden 7t Tay Norma C Fixed Forbhyden IV Tx Tagging Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete 1 Yes 1 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between
303. y temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here If you don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forwarding Table 21 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Enter the port s where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the no
304. y the screen as shown next Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Filtering a cun NN Active Name MAC VID Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 English keyboard characters for this rule This is for identification only MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Filtering Table 22 Advanced Application gt Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings A
305. your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and want to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 to DHCP client A based on the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Figure 24 Tutorial DHCP Relay Scenario E m l DHCP Server 192 168 2 3 Port 2 PVID 102 6 1 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Figure 25 Tutorial Set VLAN Type to 802 1Q xung VLAN Type S 502 1 C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active O MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer po milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer pon milliseconds Leave All Timer ioo milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level jez level5 5 gt level4 4 gt level3 3 level2 1 level joz level zj Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VALN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN 6 Clear
306. ys the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour
307. ys use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2024 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 Multicast 21 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 21 1 4 on page 144 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 5 xz pina LAN Multicast Setting Mode auto C fixed Apply Cancel VLAN Name VID Add Cancel Clear Index Name VID Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Selec

ES-2024 Series User's Guide V3.90 (Nov 2008)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents